summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-03-12 00:04:57 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-03-12 00:04:57 +0000
commitb93495d96a481c80e8feab510d8eebea5a166b02 (patch)
treeefc8ceac7cbf9b2587f474ff4dc21b5007b598bd
parent6d184abba1025d22c5317531c2e3e253ad7583bd (diff)
new-to-tl biblatex-dw 1.3 (11mar10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@17433 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES550
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex204
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex59
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex74
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdfbin0 -> 514676 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex1192
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdfbin0 -> 528899 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex1319
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdfbin0 -> 376282 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib790
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdfbin0 -> 393519 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex167
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdfbin0 -> 344018 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdfbin0 -> 361013 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex165
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib781
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx832
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx1710
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx369
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx352
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx242
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx119
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check4
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds1
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/biblatex-dw.tlpsrc0
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc1
32 files changed, 9616 insertions, 3 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7f26cefd0cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
@@ -0,0 +1,550 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+ Version history
+ ---------------
+
+v1.3 [2010/03/11]
+
+This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9. Please
+note that you have to update biblatex as well if you would
+like to use biblatex-dw 1.3! Users might need to update
+their data due to some changes in biblatex, especially
+concerned with date specifications. Please follow the hints
+for users given in biblatex's RELEASE notes.
+
+Further changes in this release:
+ - The option 'isrn' and 'issn' were dropped. Their
+ functionality can be achieved by the biblatex option
+ 'isbn'.
+ - BUGFIX: When using 'idembibformat=dash', the @inreference
+ entries had a wrong punctuation inside the title. This is
+ now fixed.
+ - Option 'pseudoauthor' changed: if set to true (and the
+ entry option 'pseudoauthor' is used), the author of this
+ entry is printed. The new commands \bibleftpseudo and
+ \bibrightpseudo are used to enclose the author. These
+ commands are empty by default. If the global option
+ 'pseudoauthor' is set to 'false', the author of entries
+ with the entry option 'pseudoauthor' are not printed at
+ all. The default value for the global option is 'true'
+ (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry
+ option 'pseudoauthor').
+ - New command \locationdatepunct for the punctuation
+ between location and year/date. The default is \addspace.
+ - New command \locationpublisherpunct for the punctuation
+ between location and publisher. The default is
+ \addcolon\space.
+ - New command \publisherdatepunct for the punctuation
+ between publisher and year/date. The default is
+ \addcomma\space.
+
+v1.2o [2010/02/14]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options 'xref=true' and
+ 'useeditor=false', the editor was not printed in the
+ bibliography. This is now fixed. Also, some bugs
+ regarding the xref functionality in citations could be
+ fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The editors in @incollection, @inproceedings and
+ @inreference entries were printed using the name format
+ 'sortname' ('Lastname, Firstname') where it should have
+ been the name format 'byeditor' ('Firstname Lastname').
+ This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'omiteditor': If one uses 'useeditor=false'
+ and 'omiteditor=true', the editor in citations will be
+ omitted. The same applies to the xref functionality in
+ the bibliography. With 'useeditor=true', this option has
+ no effect. The standard for this option is 'false'.
+ - The limitation regarding the combination of 'xref=true',
+ 'edbyidem=true' and 'useeditor=false' is no longer valid.
+ That means, it is not necessary to have the editor in the
+ child entry as well in order to get an 'idem' string.
+ - Extended the documentation.
+
+v1.2n [2010/01/24]
+ - The option 'edbeforetitle' was discarded. The same
+ functionality can be obtained by the option 'useeditor'.
+ In this context, some bugs could be resolved.
+ - New option 'omitpages': if set to 'true', the page range
+ of @article, @inbook, @incollection or @inproceedings
+ entries will be suppressed in full citations.
+ The standard value is 'false'.
+ - Extended the documentation regarding the xref
+ functionality.
+
+v1.2m [2010/01/18]
+ - BUGFIX: Changed the default of \citerevsdnamedelim which
+ used to be a \slash. Now it is empty, because otherwise
+ it produced two slashes in some circumstances.
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw with 'xref=true', the reference to
+ the first entry did not work if the first citation of a
+ parent was cited via a child. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw the punctuation of @collection
+ entries was wrong when using a prenote in conjunction
+ with 'useeditor=false' or when there was no editor. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - The biblatex option 'singletitle' can now be used both
+ with authortitle-dw and footnote-dw. Using this option, a
+ work's title is only printed if there is not more than
+ one work by the author or editor.
+ - New entry option 'pseudoauthor'. If set to true, the
+ author is put in brackets. This is useful for e.g.
+ editions of works whose authors are not named, but are
+ known. See the documentation for details. The entry
+ option does only have effect if the global option
+ 'pseudoauthor' is set to 'true'. The default value is
+ 'false'.
+
+v1.2l [2009/10/19]
+ - BUGFIX: With footnote-dw, the references to the first
+ citations did not work, when refsections were used. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With xref=true, when no volume was present in an
+ @inreference entry as well as in its corresponding
+ @reference entry, the bibstring 'vol.' was printed. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - New option 'shortjournal'. If set to 'true', the field
+ 'shortjournal' is used instead of 'journaltitle'. This is
+ useful for journal abbreviations. The default is 'false'.
+ - New option 'acronyms'. If set to 'true', shorthands (and
+ with 'shortjournal=true' also the abbreviated journal
+ titles) are set with the command \mkbibacro, but only if
+ the entry option 'acronym' is set to 'true'. The default
+ is 'false'.
+ - New option 'pageref' (in footnote-dw only). If set to
+ 'true', it adds the page to the footnote number pointing
+ to the full citation if it is located on a different
+ page. This option is the same as in the standard styles
+ 'verbose-note' and 'verbose-inote'. The default is false.
+ - In footnote-dw, the pointer to the earlier citation is
+ suppressed if a shorthand exists and the option 'citedas'
+ is true. Note that you can override the global option
+ 'citedas' by setting the entry option 'citedas'.
+
+v1.2k [2009/08/22]
+ Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8e. Note that from this
+ version on biblatex 0.8e is required, so you have to update
+ biblatex as well if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.2k!
+ - Compound abbreviations (introduced in biblatex-dw 1.2i)
+ are now separated by the new biblatex command
+ '\addabthinspace'; this affects only the German
+ localization in strings like 'hg. v.'
+ - The improved concatenation of roles is used. See
+ biblatex's release notes for details.
+ - The new auxiliary macros for ordinals are used. See
+ biblatex's release notes for details.
+ BUGFIXES
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'ibidpage' did not work with
+ footnote-dw. This is now fixed.
+ Changed Entry Types
+ - @inreference
+ Up to now, this entry type was an alias for
+ @incollection. From now on, this entry type can be used
+ for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. For
+ details on how @inreference entries differ from @
+ incollection entries, please consult the documentation.
+ The @reference type remains an alias for @collection.
+ New Options
+ - 'isrn' and 'pagetotal'
+ These options can take the values 'true' and 'false'.
+ With these options you can decide whether you want to
+ have printed the corresponding fields or not.
+ The default for these options is 'false'.
+ - 'edstringincitations'
+ If set to 'true', the editor and translator strings are
+ shown in the citations (not only in the full citations).
+ The default is 'true'.
+ - 'series=standard|afteryear'
+ If set to 'afteryear', the series is printed after the
+ year. This affects the entry types @book, @inbook,
+ @collection, @incollection, @proceedings, @inproceedings
+ and @manual.
+ New Commands
+ - 'seriespunct'
+ punctuation before the series (of a book etc.). This
+ punctuation is set inside the parentheses. You can set it
+ e.g. to '=\addspace' which is common in some fields. The
+ default is empty, i.e. the series is printed right after
+ the opening round bracket.
+ - 'sernumstring'
+ punctuation between series (of a book etc.) and number.
+ The default is '\addspace'. You can easily redefine it,
+ e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ This would give '(Name of Series, vol. N)'.
+ - 'herenamepunct'
+ If the 'herename' is used, the punctuation before the
+ herename is determined by 'herenamepunct'. The default is
+ \addcomma\space.
+ Localization Changes
+ - In German localization, the strings 'withcommentator',
+ 'withannotator' and 'withintroduction' are shortened as
+ follows:
+ -> withcommentator: komm. v.
+ -> withannotator: erläut. v.
+ -> withintroduction: eingel. v.
+ The long versions stay the same as in standard biblatex.
+
+v1.2j [2009/08/16]
+ - This is just a bugfix release. The only files changed are
+ footnote-dw.cbx, CHANGES, README and LIESMICH.
+ - BUGFIX: Since biblatex version 0.8e, footnote-dw gave an
+ error (Undefined control sequence: \blx@addperiod). This
+ is now fixed; thus, biblatex-dw (or rather footnote-dw)
+ should work with the biblatex versions 0.8e, 0.8f, 0.8g
+ and 0.8h, but it will not work with earlier versions.
+
+v1.2i [2009/05/10]
+ - BUGFIX: When using option 'usetranslator=true', the
+ translator string was not aware of the option
+ 'editorstring'. This is now fixed.
+ - Improved bibmacro 'journal+issuetitle' which is now aware
+ of the option 'edbeforetitle'.
+ - The 'typeeditor' field is now supported. It can take the
+ values 'editor' and 'compiler'. This field determines the
+ editor string after the name of the editor(s). The
+ abbreviated forms are 'ed.' for 'editor' and 'comp.' for
+ 'compiler'. In German, both strings are the same
+ ('Herausgeber' or 'Hrsg.').
+ - In English, the 'idem' string is now declined (idem,
+ eadem, idem in singular; eidem, eaedem, eadem in plural)
+ and no longer abbreviated, even if abbreviate=true is
+ used.
+ - Improved the handling of 'origfields=true'.
+ - In German, the string 'reprint' (Nachdruck) is now
+ abbreviated as 'Ndr.', not as 'Nachdr.'
+ - Compound abbreviations are now separated by a thin space
+ rather than a normal one. At the moment, this affects
+ only the German localization in strings like 'hg. v.'
+
+v1.2h [2009/03/29]
+ - BUGFIX: The 'idem' functionality is now also aware of
+ page breaks. If the citation is the first on a page (or
+ double page in twoside mode), the 'idem' is suppressed.
+ If you don't want this behaviour, you can set the option
+ 'pagetracker=false'.
+
+v1.2g [2009/03/20]
+ - Option 'journalnumber' replaces 'journumafteryear'. The
+ option was enhanced and can now take the values
+ 'standard', 'afteryear' and 'date'. The value 'standard'
+ is the same as the old journumafteryear=false,
+ 'afteryear' is the same as the old journumafteryear=true.
+ The new value 'date' assures that the date is printed,
+ even if the field issue is given (this is not the case in
+ the standard styles). Additionally, 'journalnumber=date'
+ prints the number before the date, if the date (at least
+ year and month) is given, but it prints the number after
+ the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date is
+ not further specified). See the documentation for
+ details. The default is 'journalnumber=standard'.
+ - Improved german-dw.lbx.
+ - Adjusted the documentation for screen reading. A printer
+ friendly version can still be compiled from the source.
+
+v1.2f [2009/02/15]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8c. Note that from
+ this version on biblatex 0.8c is required, so you have to
+ update biblatex as well if you would like to use
+ biblatex-dw 1.2f!
+ -> The biblatex-dw option 'idem' was replaced by the new
+ biblatex option 'idemtracker'. The standard setting is
+ 'idemtracker=constrict'. If you would like to switch
+ off the idem functionality, you can use
+ 'idemtracker=false'. For more information on the
+ 'idemtracker' option see the biblatex manual.
+ - New options 'doi', 'eprint', 'isbn' and 'issn' which can
+ take the values 'true' and 'false'. With these options
+ you can decide whether you want to have printed the
+ corresponding fields or not. The default for these
+ options is 'false' (as was the standard before).
+ - New option 'idemfont' which can take the values
+ 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold' and 'normal'. The default
+ is none which means that the 'idem' string is printed in
+ the font shape of 'namefont'.
+ - New option 'ibidemfont' which can take the values
+ 'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. The default is none
+ which means that the 'ibidem' string is printed in normal
+ font shape.
+ - New macro 'jourvolstring' which introduces the volume of
+ an article entry. The default is a space (as it was the
+ case before), but you can adjust it to your needs, e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace vol\adddot\space}
+ - New macro 'journumstring' which introduces the number in
+ article entries, if the option 'journumafteryear' is set
+ to 'true'. The default for this macro is a comma,
+ followed by the bibstring 'number' and a non-breakable
+ space. You can redefine it to your needs, e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ - If there is no volume in an article entry, but the month
+ field is set, the date is separated from the journal
+ title by a comma and a space, not only a space.
+ - Fixed some BUGS concerning the xref functionality.
+ - Reorganized some bibliography drivers.
+ - Enhanced the documentation.
+
+v1.2e [2008/12/19]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8b. Note that from
+ this version on biblatex 0.8b is required, so you have to
+ update biblatex as well if you would like to use
+ biblatex-dw 1.2e!
+ -> The new biblatex option 'usetranslator' is supported.
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'firstfullname' introduced in version
+ 1.2d had a bug which is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The 'idem' functionality did not work with the
+ multicite commands. This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'journumafteryear': If set to 'true', the
+ 'number' in article entries is printed after the year and
+ introduced by the bibstring 'number'. If set to 'false',
+ the default behaviour is used, i.e. 'Journaltitle
+ volume.number (year)'. The default is 'true'.
+ -> If 'journumafteryear' is set 'false', the separator
+ between volume and number in @article entries is now
+ configurable with the new command '\jourvolnumsep'.
+ The default is a dot (which is also the default in
+ biblatex).
+ - When the 'volume' is missing, the parenthesis around the
+ year in @article entries is omitted.
+ - The multicite command \cites is now also always printed
+ as footnote in 'footnote-dw'.
+ - Some changes in the internal code.
+ - Extended the documentation and examples.
+
+v1.2d [2008/12/07]
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw, the punctuation after the author/
+ editor in all citations but the first one was always a
+ comma and not configurable by \citenamepunct. This is now
+ fixed.
+ - New option 'firstfullname': when set to 'true', the
+ commands \citeauthor and \textcite (with footnote-dw:
+ \citeauthor only) give the full name of authors/editors
+ when they have not been cited before, not only the last
+ name. The default is 'false'.
+ - Support for biblatex version 0.8a including
+ \MakeSentenceCase.
+ - Added lbx files with alternative strings for German and
+ additional strings for both German and English (these
+ strings were already included, but are now stored in the
+ language mapping files).
+
+v1.2c [2008/11/15]
+ - New option 'idembibformat': When using 'idembib=true',
+ you can choose whether you want to have an 'idem' string
+ in the bibliography (idembibformat=idem) or a dash
+ (idembibformat=dash), as is the standard setting in
+ biblatex. The standard is 'idembibformat=idem'.
+ - Option 'idembib' changed: Now 'false' means that
+ subsequent entries of the same author are given with full
+ names, not a dash (as was the behaviour up to now). The
+ standard is 'idembib=true'.
+ - Improved xref support: The child entry does not only scan
+ for the 'volume' field of the parent entry, but prints
+ also 'location' and 'year', if they differ from the
+ parent entry.
+
+v1.2b [2008/11/09]
+ - BUGFIX: With 'xref=true', the first (full) citation did
+ not show the overall pages of @INBOOK, @INCOLLECTION and
+ @INPROCEEDINGS entries. This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'nolocation'. If set to 'true', the location
+ and the publisher are omitted (even if you set
+ 'nopublisher=false'). The default is 'false', i.e. the
+ location is printed.
+ - The option 'shorthandibid' can now also be used on a
+ per-entry basis.
+ - Improved xref support: If the 'volume' field of a child
+ entry is set and the 'volume' field of the corresponding
+ parent entry is not set, the volume of the child entry
+ will be printed immediately before the pages.
+
+v1.2a [2008/10/19]
+ - Improved option 'edsuper' which also outputs non-integer
+ editions (though not as superscript, but rather similar
+ to a note.)
+ - The field 'origpublisher' (new in biblatex 0.8) is now
+ also supported.
+ - New option 'origfields' which can take the values 'true'
+ (standard) and 'false'. With this option, you can now
+ decide, whether you want to have the fields
+ 'origlocation', 'origpublisher' and 'origyear' to be
+ printed or not.
+ -> New option 'origfieldsformat=parens|brackets|punct'.
+ The default is 'punct' which means that the new
+ punctuation mark '\origfieldspunct' (default:
+ \addcomma\space) is used to introduce the reprint
+ phrase. If you choose 'parens' or 'brackets', the
+ reprint phrase is put in parentheses or brackets,
+ respectively, and the \origfieldspunct is ignored.
+ - New option 'shorthandwidth'. With this option you can set
+ the width of the label in the list of shorthands to any
+ length (e.g. '3em' or '40pt'). This is useful if you have
+ very long shorthands.
+ -> New punctuation command '\shorthandpunct' which is
+ only exerted when you use the option 'shorthandwidth'.
+ Then it is set to a colon. You can redefine this
+ punctuation command with \renewcommand.
+ -> New length '\shorthandsep' which is only exerted if
+ you use the option 'shorthandwidth'. The length
+ '\shorthandsep' defines the spacing after the label in
+ the list of shorthands.
+ - Improved package warnings.
+
+v1.2 [2008/10/09]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8. Note that from
+ version 1.2 on, biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 0.8,
+ so you have to update biblatex as well if you would like
+ to use biblatex-dw 1.2!
+ -> The new biblatex option 'firstinits' is supported.
+ -> The new macro \bibpagespunct is also supported.
+ - Added option 'xref' which can be set to 'true' or
+ 'false'. If you want to use the crossref functionality
+ (introduced in biblatex-dw version 1.1f), you now have to
+ set 'xref=true'. See the documentation for details.
+ - As biblatex 0.8 has changed the handling of the field
+ 'edition', the option 'edsuper' had to be adjusted. See
+ the documentation of biblatex-dw for details.
+ - Updated the documentation.
+
+v1.1h [2008/09/24]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options 'edbeforetitle' and
+ 'edbyidem', the idem funcionality did not work. This is
+ now fixed.
+ - Updated documentation (see especially, if you are using
+ the crossref functionality) and examples.
+
+v1.1g [2008/09/05]
+ - The biblatex package option 'mincrossrefs' is set to '1'
+ (instead of '2'). The reason is that otherwise entries
+ that are using the crossref functionality introduced in
+ biblatex-dw version 1.1f could be incomplete.
+ - If both 'volumes' and 'volume' are present, 'volumes' is
+ now set before 'volume'.
+
+v1.1f [2008/08/10]
+ - BUGFIX: Corrected wrong punctuation when using 'idembib=
+ false' in conjunction with an editor.
+ - Added crossref functionality (using biblatex's field
+ 'xref'). This works for authortitle-dw as well as
+ footnote-dw. For further information please have a look
+ into the package documentation.
+
+v1.1e [2008/06/13]
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'edbeforetitle' caused a problem
+ when used together with the 'idem' functionality
+ (which is the default). This is now fixed.
+ - Enhanced the 'idem' functionality: If a citation with
+ shorthand precedes a citation of the same author or
+ editor without shorthand, the string 'idem' is now
+ replaced by the author's or editor's name, since this
+ information cannot be gathered from the shorthand
+ citation and thus could mislead the reader.
+
+v1.1d [2008/06/05]
+ - BUGFIX: The global option 'oldauthor' which was
+ introduced in version 1.1c caused an erroneous behaviour
+ when used together with 'idembib=true' (which is the
+ default). This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'editorstring' which can take the values
+ 'parens', 'brackets' and 'normal'; the default is
+ 'parens'. This option sets the string 'editor'
+ (abbreviated 'ed.') in parentheses or in brackets, or
+ just puts the string (with a preceding comma) after the
+ editor name.
+ - New option 'edbeforetitle' which can take the values
+ 'true' and 'false'; the default is 'false'. When set to
+ 'true', the editor in @INCOLLECTION and @INPROCEEDINGS
+ entries will be typeset before the booktitle ('... in:
+ Editor (ed.): Booktitle ...') rather than afterwards
+ ('... in: Booktitle, ed. by Editor ...').
+ - Small correction in the terse version of the List of
+ Shorthands concerning the punctuation after authors/
+ editors.
+ - Added missing bibliography drivers for option 'edbyidem'.
+
+v1.1c [2008/05/29]
+ - BUGFIX: With the option 'idem=false', the author of a
+ first citation who was cited immediately before with
+ another work lacked the forename.
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'edbyidem=false' produced a
+ superfluous 'ed. by' string.
+ - BUGFIX: Small punctuation issue with repeated citations
+ and 'herename'.
+ - New option 'namefont' which can take the values
+ 'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. The default is none,
+ i.e. authors and editors are set in normal font shape.
+ With 'useprefix=true', this option also affects the
+ name prefix.
+ - New option 'firstnamefont' which can take the values
+ 'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. This also affects the
+ name prefix (with 'useprefix=false') and the name
+ affix.
+ - The option 'oldauthor' is now also available as global
+ option in order to disable the feature. If you set
+ 'oldauthor=false' globally, every entry option
+ 'oldauthor=true' is ignored. Thus, you can set the
+ fontname for every author with global options,
+ independent of entry options.
+
+v1.1b [2008/04/13]
+ - BUGFIX: When using \parencite with 'footnote-dw',
+ additional parentheses (e.g. enclosing the string
+ 'editor') were lost; they are now replaced by brackets.
+ - BUGFIX: In 'footnote-dw', the normal \cite command
+ always produced a capital letter at the beginning. This
+ is fixed now.
+ - Fixed a small punctuation error in connection with
+ 'herename'.
+ - New command \titleaddonpunct for the punctuation before
+ titleaddon, booktitleaddon and maintitleaddon. The
+ default is a period now (not a comma, as before).
+
+v1.1a [2008/02/09]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the commands 'mancite' or
+ 'citereset', the 'idem' functionality was not reset.
+ This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'edsuper'. If set to 'true', the edition is
+ printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number)
+ straight ahead of the year. The default is 'false'.
+ - New option 'firstfull' (only in 'authortitle-dw'). If
+ set to 'true', the first citation is a fullcite. The
+ default is 'false'.
+ - Option 'citedas' is now also available for
+ 'authortitle-dw' and used when 'firstfull' is set to
+ 'true'.
+
+v1.1 [2008/02/01]
+ - BUGFIX: The 'citedas' functionality did not work if the
+ first citation of an entry was introduced by 'idem'.
+ - New option 'terselos' introduced for a terse version of
+ the list of shorthands (default is 'true').
+ - New option 'herename' introduced to specify if the term
+ \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a fullcite
+ (or, with 'footnote-dw', also the first citation of an
+ entry) which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field.
+ - New option 'nopublisher' introduced to suppress the
+ publisher. The default value is 'true', but if you want
+ to have the publisher printed, you now can set the
+ option 'nopublisher=false'.
+ - If the field 'origlocation' is given, it will be set
+ together with 'origyear', whereas 'location' and 'year'
+ are appended in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring
+ 'reprint'.
+ - The options 'annotation' and 'library' are now also
+ usable with the style 'footnote-dw'. The annotations
+ and library information are only printed in the
+ bibliography (if there is one), not in the citations or
+ in the list of shorthands.
+ - Updated documentation.
+
+v1.01 [2008/01/20]
+ - BUGFIX: The 'pagetracker' functionality did not work
+ properly with the style 'footnote-dw'
+ - Excluded ISBN/ISSN and DOI also from entry types
+ booklet, inproceedings, manual, misc, periodical,
+ proceedings, and report
+ - Punctuation corrections for the same entry types
+ concerning the series+number
+
+v1.0 [2008/01/14]
+ - Initial release
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f5ecd763ea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+************************************************************
+
+Inhalt der Datei LIESMICH
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ 3. Benutzung
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ 6. Danksagung
+ 7. Lizenz
+ 8. Dateien
+
+
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ -------------------
+
+ biblatex-dw ist eine kleine Sammlung von styles für das
+ Paket biblatex von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum
+ Zitieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich und bietet
+ dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen
+ von biblatex hinausgehen. biblatex-dw baut vollständig auf
+ biblatex auf und kann nicht ohne biblatex (mindestens
+ Version 0.9) benutzt werden!
+
+ Anregungen und Verbesserungsvorschläge sind jederzeit
+ willkommen.
+
+
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ ------------------------
+
+ Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den $LOCALTEXMF-Ordner ihres
+ Systems. Aktualisieren Sie anschließend die 'filename
+ database' ihrer TeX-Distribution. MiKTeX-Benutzer können
+ das entweder im Dialog 'Settings' mit der Schaltfläche
+ 'Refresh FNDB' erledigen oder von der Kommandozeile aus mit
+ dem Befehl 'initexmf --refresh-fndb'. Wenn Sie eine andere
+ LaTeX-Distribution verwenden, schlagen Sie bitte in der
+ Dokumentation Ihrer Distribution nach, wie Sie entsprechend
+ vorgehen müssen.
+
+
+ 3. Benutzung
+ ------------
+
+ Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-
+ Stile beim Laden des Pakets biblatex eingebunden:
+
+ \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ bzw.
+ \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ Für zusätzliche Optionen, die von den Stilen bereitgestellt
+ werden, wird auf die Dokumentation von biblatex-dw sowie
+ auf die Beispiele 'de-authortitle-dw' und 'de-footnote-dw'
+ im Ordner 'examples' verwiesen.
+
+
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ ----------------
+
+ Die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw findet
+ sich in der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.pdf'. Diese Datei ist für
+ den Bildschirm optimiert. Eine Druckversion lässt sich aber
+ leicht aus der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.tex' generieren, indem
+ man die Zeile
+ \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % davorstellt)
+ und stattdessen die Zeile
+ \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ nicht auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % vor
+ dieser Zeile löscht).
+ Achtung: Möglicherweise sind die Schriften nicht auf Ihrem
+ System vorhanden. Für die Dokumentation wurden folgende
+ Schriften verwendet:
+ * Linux Libertine als Brotschrift
+ * Linux Biolinum (Teil des Libertine-Pakets) für
+ Ãœberschriften
+ * BeraMono als Festbreitenschrift
+ Diese Schriften sind frei verfügbar. Wenn Sie die Schriften
+ nicht installiert haben oder nicht installieren wollen,
+ verwenden Sie einfach andere Schriften. Die entsprechenden
+ Einstellungen finden Sie in der Datei
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'.
+
+
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ ---------------------
+
+ siehe Datei CHANGES
+
+
+ 6. Danksagung
+ -------------
+
+ Ohne biblatex gäbe es natürlich auch kein biblatex-dw,
+ deshalb gebührt mein Dank zuvorderst Philipp Lehman, auch
+ für die vielen Hilfestellungen und Hinweise, die er mir
+ immer wieder gegeben hat. Für Anregungen, Hinweise und
+ das Auffinden und Melden von Fehlern bedanke ich mich
+ außerdem bei folgenden Personen:
+ * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann * Denis Maier
+ * Rolf Niepraschk * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel * Christofer Zwanzig
+ * Дмитрий Гордеев
+
+
+ 7. Lizenz
+ ---------
+
+ Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project
+ Public Lizenz, entweder Version 1.3 oder (nach Ihrer Wahl)
+ jede spaetere Version, verteilt und/oder verändert werden.
+ Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz finden Sie unter
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. Version 1.3 (oder
+ eine neuere) ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX
+ Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter.
+
+ Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status 'maintained'
+ (betreut).
+
+ Der aktuelle Betreuer dieses Werkes ist Dominik Waßenhoven.
+
+
+ 8. Dateien
+ ----------
+
+ Dieses Werk (bzw. Paket) besteht aus folgenden Dateien:
+
+ * LIESMICH % diese Datei (inkl. Lizenz)
+ * README % diese Datei in englisch
+ * CHANGES % Versionsgeschichte (englisch)
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx % Englische Sprachdatei
+ * german-dw.lbx % Deutsche Sprachdatei
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Präambel der Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Einstellungen für Druckversion
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Einst. für Bildschirmversion
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % deutsche Dokumentation
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex % deutsche Dokumentation
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex
+ * examples-dw.bib
+ * de-examples-dw.bib % bib-Datei für die Beispiele
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..15d1c2af620
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+************************************************************
+
+Contents of README
+ 1. Package description
+ 2. Installation
+ 3. Usage notes
+ 4. Documentation
+ 5. History
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ 7. Licence
+ 8. Files
+
+
+ 1. Package description
+ ----------------------
+
+ biblatex-dw is a small collection of styles for the
+ biblatex package. It was designed for citations in the
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided
+ by the standard biblatex styles. biblatex-dw is dependend
+ on biblatex (version 0.9 at least) and cannot be used
+ without it!
+
+ Any suggestions concerning this package are highly
+ appreciated.
+
+
+ 2. Installation
+ ---------------
+
+ Extract the zip archive to the $LOCALTEXMF directory of
+ your system. Refresh your filename database. In MiKTeX,
+ this is done in the 'Settings' dialog, button
+ 'Refresh FNDB', or from the command line with the command
+ 'initexmf --refresh-fndb'. For other LaTeX distributions,
+ please see its documentation for details.
+
+
+ 3. Usage notes
+ --------------
+
+ The styles are loaded as the biblatex standard styles:
+
+ \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ or
+ \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ If you want to learn more about the styles and their
+ additional options, please consult the package
+ documentation as well as the examples 'en-authortitle-dw'
+ and 'en-footnote-dw' in the 'examples' folder.
+
+
+ 4. Documentation
+ ----------------
+
+ The English documentation of biblatex-dw can be found in
+ the file 'biblatex-dw.pdf'. This file is intended for
+ viewing on a computer screen. A printable version can be
+ compiled from the file 'biblatex-dw.tex'. You only have to
+ comment the line
+ \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ (i.e. put a % sign in front of it) and uncomment the line
+ \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ (i.e. delete the % sign at the beginning of this line).
+ Note: The fonts may not be installed on your system. The
+ following fonts were used for the documentation:
+ * Linux Libertine in running text
+ * Linux Biolinum (part of the Libertine package) for
+ headings
+ * BeraMono as typewriter font
+ These fonts are freely available. If you do not have these
+ fonts installed in your system or do not want to install
+ them, you can easily use another font. The relevant
+ settings can be found in the file
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'.
+
+
+ 5. History
+ ----------
+
+ see file CHANGES
+
+
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ -------------------
+
+ First of all, I would like to thank Philipp Lehman not only
+ for his wonderful package 'biblatex', but also for his
+ helping hand and advice in creating these styles.
+ Furthermore, for numerous suggestions, contributions and
+ bug reports I would like to thank the following people:
+ * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann * Denis Maier
+ * Rolf Niepraschk * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel * Christofer Zwanzig
+ * Дмитрий Гордеев
+
+
+ 7. Licence
+ ----------
+
+ This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+ version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+ version. The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or
+ later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+ 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+ This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+ The Current Maintainer of this work is Dominik Waßenhoven.
+
+
+ 8. Files
+ --------
+
+ This work consists of the following files:
+
+ * README % this file, including licence
+ * LIESMICH % the README in German
+ * CHANGES % version history
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx % English language mapping file
+ * german-dw.lbx % German language mapping file
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Preamble for the documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Settings for printable version
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Settings for screen version
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % German documentation
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex % German documentation
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf % English example
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex % English example
+ * examples-dw.bib % bib for English examples
+ * de-examples-dw.bib
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41387213bcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file is the preamble for the documentation of
+% biblatex-dw (both the English and the German version)
+
+%%%%% biblatex-dw Version %%%%% version of biblatex-dw %%%%%
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwversion}{1.3}
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwdate}{\printdate{2010-03-11}}
+\newcommand{\screenversion}{}
+\newcommand{\TOC}{}
+\newcommand{\lizenz}{}
+
+%%%%% Kodierung %%%%% Encoding %%%%%
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+
+%%%%% Schriftarten %%%%% Fonts %%%%%
+\usepackage{libertine}% Linux Libertine & Biolinum
+\renewcommand{\&}{%
+ \useTextGlyph{fxl}{ampersand.alt}}% alternatives Ampersand
+\setkomafont{sectioning}{\sffamily}% Überschriften
+\renewcommand{\headfont}{\normalfont\itshape}% Kolumnentitel
+\usepackage[scaled=0.8]{beramono}% BeraMono als Typewriter-Schrift
+
+%%%%% Fußnoten %%%%% Footnotes %%%%%
+\deffootnote%
+ {2em}% Einzug des Fußnotentextes; bei dreistelligen Fußnoten evtl. vergrößern
+ {1em}% zusätzlicher Absatzeinzug in der Fußnote
+ {%
+ \makebox[2em]% Raum für Fußnotenzeichen: ebenso groß wie Einzug des FN-Textes
+ [r]% Ausrichtung des Fußnotenzeichens: [r]echts, [l]inks
+ {\fontfamily{fxl}\selectfont% keine Mediävalziffern als Fußnotenmarke
+ \thefootnotemark%
+ \hspace{1em}% Abstand zw. FN-Zeichen und FN-Text
+ }%
+ }
+\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{}% keine Zeile zw. Text und Fußnoten
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\usepackage{scrpage2}
+\pagestyle{scrheadings}
+\clearscrheadfoot
+
+%%%%% Farben %%%%% Colors %%%%%
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\definecolor{dkblue}{rgb}{0 0.1 0.5}% dark blue
+\definecolor{dkred}{rgb}{0.85 0 0}% dark red
+\definecolor{pyellow}{rgb}{1 0.97 0.75}% pale yellow
+
+%%%%% Kompakte Listen %%%%% Compact lists %%%%%
+\usepackage{enumitem}
+\setlist{noitemsep}
+\setitemize{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+\setenumerate{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+
+%%%%% Datumsformat %%%%% Date format %%%%%
+\usepackage{isodate}
+\numdate[arabic]% 15. 9. 2008
+\isotwodigitdayfalse% führende Nullen weglassen
+
+%%%%% Spracheinstellungen %%%%% Language settings %%%%%
+\usepackage{babel}
+\newcommand{\versionname}{Version}
+\iflanguage{english}{\renewcommand{\versionname}{version}}{}
+\iflanguage{german}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{ngerman}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{english}{\isodate}{}
+
+%%%%% Verschiedene Pakete %%%%% Miscellaneous packages
+\usepackage{microtype}% optischer Randausgleich
+\usepackage{dtklogos}% Logos wie \BibTeX
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage{textcomp}% Text-Companion-Symbole
+\usepackage{manfnt}% für das Achtung-Symbol
+\usepackage{marginnote}
+\reversemarginpar
+
+%%%%% Auslassungspunkte %%%%% dots %%%%%
+\let\ldotsOld\ldots
+\renewcommand{\ldots}{\ldotsOld\unkern}
+
+%%%%% Zwischenraum vor und nach \slash %%%%% Spacing around \slash %%%%%
+\let\slashOld\slash
+\renewcommand{\slash}{\kern.05em\slashOld\kern.05em}
+
+%%%%% Anführungszeichen %%%%% quotation marks %%%%%
+\usepackage[babel,german=guillemets]{csquotes}
+\MakeAutoQuote{»}{«}
+
+%%%%% Listings %%%%% listings %%%%%
+\usepackage{listings}
+\lstset{%
+ frame=none,
+% backgroundcolor=\color{pyellow},
+ language=[LaTeX]TeX,
+ basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,
+ commentstyle=\color{red},
+ keywordstyle=, % LaTeX-Befehle werden nicht fett dargestellt
+ numbers=none,%left/right
+% numberstyle=\tiny\lnstyle,
+% numbersep=5pt,
+% numberblanklines=false,
+ breaklines=true,
+% caption=\lstname,
+ xleftmargin=5pt,
+ xrightmargin=5pt,
+ escapeinside={(*}{*)},
+ belowskip=\medskipamount,
+ prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% übernommen vom scrguide (KOMA-Script)
+}
+
+%%%%% biblatex %%%%% biblatex %%%%%
+\usepackage[%
+ bibtex8=true,
+ bibencoding=inputenc,
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+% bernhard=true,%
+ journalnumber=date
+]{biblatex}
+\bibliography{examples/examples-dw}
+
+%%%%% Hyperref %%%%% Hyperref %%%%%
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=true,%
+ linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+ citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+ urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+ pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+ pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+ pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+ pdfstartview=FitH,%
+% bookmarksopen=true,%
+% bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
+ pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
+
+%%%%% Kurzbefehle %%%%% shortening commands %%%%%
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\wert}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{\enquote*{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\paket}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\xbx}[1]{\enquote{#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibung}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibung[2][]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\tmp@beschreibung{#1}%
+ \ifx\tmp@beschreibung\@empty
+ % leerer Fall
+ \label{#2}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+ \else
+ % unleerer Fall
+ \label{#1}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \egroup
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\newcommand{\bl}{\paket{biblatex}}
+\newcommand{\bldw}{\paket{biblatex-dw}}
+
+% \optlist[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option (Wert)
+% \optset[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option=Wert
+% \opt{Option}
+% \optnur[nur bei xy]{Option}
+% \befehl{Befehlsname}{Definition}{Beschreibung}
+% \befehlleer{Befehlsname}{Beschreibung}
+\newcommand{\optlist}[3][]{\item[\option{#2}](#3) \emph{#1}\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optset}[3][]{\item[\option{#2=#3}] \emph{#1}\\}
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\item[\option{#1}]~\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optnur}[2][]{\item[\option{#2}]\emph{#1}\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\befehl}[3]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\texttt{#2}\\{#3}}
+\newcommand{\befehlleer}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\emph{(\iflanguage{english}{empty}{leer})}\\{#2}}
+\newcommand{\biblstring}[3]{%
+ \item[\option{#1}]\texttt{#2}\hspace{0.4em}\textbullet\hspace{0.4em}\texttt{#3}}
+
+\newcommand{\achtung}{\marginnote{\footnotesize\dbend}}
+
+\newcounter{beispiel}
+\newcommand{\beispiel}{%
+ \iflanguage{english}{Example}{Beispiel}}
+\newcommand{\seite}[1]{%
+ \iflanguage{english}{page~#1}{Seite~#1}}
+%%%%% Titelei %%%%% titel page %%%%%
+\author{Dominik Waßenhoven}
+\title{biblatex-dw}
+\date{Version~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}
+
+%%%%% Worttrennungen %%%%% Hyphenation %%%%%
+\usepackage[htt]{hyphenat}
+\hyphenation{
+ Stan-dard-ein-stel-lun-gen
+} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0398300f73d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file configures the documentation
+% of biblatex-dw to be printed
+
+%%%%% KOMA-Script Optionen %%%%% KOMA-Script options %%%%%
+\KOMAoptions{
+ paper=a4
+ ,headinclude=true
+% ,fontsize=12pt,DIV=calc
+ ,fontsize=11pt,DIV=9
+}
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\ihead{%
+ \iflanguage{english}%
+ {biblatex-dw documentation}%
+ {Dokumentation von biblatex-dw}}
+\ohead{\versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}% Kopf rechts
+\cfoot{\pagemark}
+
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \itshape
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+ or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+ License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+ \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+ der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+ verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+ \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}
+ \clearpage}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\let\TOC\tableofcontents
+
+%%%%% Keine farbigen Links %%%%% No coloured links %%%%%
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=false,%
+ %linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+ %citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+ %urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+ %pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+ %pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+ %pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+ %pdfstartview=FitH,%
+% bookmarksopen=true,%
+% bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
+ %pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69bf2055519
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file configures the documentation
+% of biblatex-dw to be viewed on a screen
+
+%%%%% Satzspiegel %%%%% type area %%%%%
+% übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\usepackage{geometry}
+\geometry{papersize={140mm,210mm},%
+ includehead,includemp,reversemp,marginparwidth=2em,%
+ vmargin={2mm,4mm},hmargin=2mm}%
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+% zu großen Teilen übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% for the most part adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\makeatletter
+ \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\oddsidemargin}%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{1in}%
+ \setheadwidth[-\@tempdimc]{paper}%
+\makeatother
+\ohead{\smash{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\pagemark\hspace{2mm}}}%
+\ihead[%
+ {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+ \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+ \makebox[2em][r]%
+ biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}]%
+ {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+ \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+ \makebox[2em][r]%
+ biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}%
+
+%%%%% Hinweis zur Bildschirmversion %%%%% note on screen version %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\screenversion}{%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \color{dkred}
+ \sffamily
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This is the screen version of the \bldw{} documentation.
+ If you would like to have a printable version, please have a look
+ at the \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dies ist die Bildschirmversion der Dokumentation von \bldw{}.
+ Wenn Sie eine Druckversion haben möchten, schauen Sie bitte in die
+ Datei \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}}
+
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \itshape
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+ or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+ License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+ \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+ der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+ verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+ \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}}
+
+%%%%% Kein Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% No Table of Contents %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\TOC}{\clearpage} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38188002c03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..975abc9b163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1192 @@
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+\documentclass[english]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% preamble
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% printable version
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% screen version
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Begin of Document %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} is a small collection of styles for the
+ \bl{} package. It was designed for citations in the
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided
+ by the standard \bl{} styles. \bldw{} is dependend
+ on \bl{}, at least version~0.9 (please note also the requirements
+ of the \bl{} package itself).}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\subsection{Installation}
+Extract the zip archive to the \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF} directory of
+ your system.\footnote{If you don't know what that is, have a look at
+\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds} or
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html}.} Refresh your filename database. In
+MiKTeX, this is done in the \enquote{Settings} dialog, button \enquote{Refresh
+FNDB}, or from the command line with the command \texttt{initexmf
+-{}-refresh-fndb}. For other LaTeX distributions, please see its documentation
+for details. Here is some additional information from the UK \TeX\ FAQ:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=install-where}{%
+ Where to install packages}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=inst-wlcf}{%
+ Installing files \enquote{where \LaTeXTeX\ can find them}}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=privinst}{%
+ \enquote{Private} installations of files}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Usage}
+The styles are loaded in the same way as the \bl{} standard styles:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+or
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The styles are built in a very entangled way which means that the combination of a \bldw\ style with another style is not possible without fail.
+
+ The \bldw\ styles and their additional options are clarified
+ on the next pages. See also the examples \enquote{en-authortitle-dw}
+ and \enquote{en-footnote-dw} in the \texttt{examples} folder.
+
+\subsection{Frequently asked Questions (FAQ)}
+I answered some frequently asked questions concerning \bl{} and \bldw{} and made them
+available online:\\
+\url{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/faq.shtml?en}
+
+\clearpage
+\section{The \xbx{authortitle-dw} style}
+This style is based on the standard \xbx{authortitle} style.
+Besides some changes in punctuation, there are the following differences:
+
+\subsection{Appearance in the bibliography}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The\beschreibung{namefont} font shape of authors and editors can be set by the options
+ \option{namefont} and\beschreibung{firstnamefont} \option{firstnamefont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}.
+ If you set \option{useprefix=true}, \option{namefont} affects also
+ the name prefix (i.\,e. \enquote{von}, \enquote{de} etc.). If \option{%
+ useprefix=false} is set (which is the default), the name prefix depends
+ on the option \option{firstnamefont} which in every case affects the
+ name suffix (the \enquote{junior} part).
+ \item If\beschreibung{oldauthor} you set the \option{namefont}, but nevertheless need some
+ of the names being typeset in upright shape (e.g. medieval or
+ antique authors), you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}}
+ or \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} to the respective entry of your
+ bib file. If you have to switch back to the normal appearance also
+ for entries with this \texttt{oldauthor} flag, you can set the global
+ option \option{oldauthor=false} in order to override the entry option.
+ \item The\beschreibung{idemfont} font shape of the \enquote{idem} string (see below) can be set by
+ the option \option{idemfont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. If you
+ do not use this option, the \enquote{idem} string is printed in the
+ same font shape as indicated by the option \option{namefont}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{ibidemfont} font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string (see below) can be set by
+ the option \option{ibidemfont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. The
+ default value is \wert{normal}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{acronyms}\beschreibung{acronym}
+ \texttt{shorthands} and journal abbreviations (\texttt{shortjournal})
+ can be set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro} (default for this command:
+ \textsc{smallcaps}). For that, you need to set the global option
+ \option{acronyms} to \wert{true} \emph{and} the entry option \option{acronym=true}.
+ If you want to customize the command \cmd{mkbibacro}, see section
+ \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}} on page~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{idembib} option \option{idembib} provides a possibility to substitute
+ identical authors\slash editors in subsequent entries in the
+ bibliography by an idem phrase. If set to \wert{false}, the names are
+ given also in subsequent entries of the same authors\slash editors.
+ Using \option{idembib=true}, the substitution is enabled. The format
+ is then set by the option\beschreibung{idembibformat} \option{idembibformat} which can take the
+ values \wert{idem} to get \enquote{idem} instead of the name(s) and
+ \wert{dash} to get a dash (---). In some languages, the idem phrase
+ is gender-specific. The gender for authors\slash editors has to be
+ given in the \texttt{gender} field of your bib file (see the \bl{}
+ documentation for details). The default value for \option{idembib} is
+ \wert{true}, the default value for \option{idembibformat} is
+ \wert{idem}.
+ \item When\beschreibung{edbyidem} \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} are the same in
+ \texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inbook} entries, the name is not
+ repeated but substituted by the string \enquote{idem}. This feature
+ is controled by the option \option{edbyidem} which can be set to
+ \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+ \item Using\beschreibung{pseudoauthor} the entry option \option{pseudoauthor}, the author can be put
+ in brackets or omitted. This is useful for editions of works whose authors
+ are not named, but are known, for instance. If the global option \option{pseudoauthor}
+ is set to \wert{true} (and the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} is used), the author of this
+ entry is printed. The new commands \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibrightpseudo}
+ are used to enclose the author. These commands are empty by default. If you would like to enclose
+ the author by brackets, for instance, you have to redefine the commands:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ If the global option
+ \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{false}, the author of entries
+ with the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} are not printed at
+ all. The default value for the global option is \wert{true}
+ (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry
+ option \option{pseudoauthor}).
+ \item With\beschreibung{nopublisher} default settings, the \texttt{publisher} is not printed, only
+ \texttt{location} and \texttt{date}. If you would like to have the
+ publisher printed, you have to set the option
+ \option{nopublisher=false}.
+ \item You\beschreibung{nolocation} can also suppress the location with \option{nolocation=true}. In
+ this case, also the publisher is omitted (regardless of the setting of
+ \option{nopublisher}). The default setting is \wert{false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{pagetotal} fields \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+ \texttt{issn} and \texttt{pagetotal} are not printed with the default
+ settings. They can however be switched on with the options
+ \option{doi=true}, \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (which is also valid
+ for the fields \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn}) or \option{pagetotal=true},
+ respectively.
+ \item The\beschreibung{origfields} option \option{origfields} lets you decide, whether you would like
+ to have the fields \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} and
+ \texttt{origdate} printed or not; the standard is \wert{true}. If you
+ use the option and the field \texttt{origlocation} is set, the
+ \enquote{orig} fields will be printed. In this case, the fields
+ \texttt{location}, \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{date} are appended
+ in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring \texttt{reprint}. Note that
+ the fields \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{origpublisher} are only
+ printed, if the option \option{nopublisher=false} is given.
+ \achtung Note also that the \texttt{edition} field applies to the
+ original edition, as reprints are normally not released in more than
+ one edition, but re-issue a specific edition. If the option
+ \option{edsuper} is used, the edition is printed as superscript number
+ ahead of \texttt{origdate}.
+ \item With\beschreibung{origfieldsformat} the option \option{origfieldsformat}, which can take the values
+ \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{punct}, you can set the
+ appearance of the reprint details (with \option{origfields=true}). The
+ values \wert{parens} and \wert{brackets} put them in parentheses or
+ brackets, respectively. The default is \wert{punct}; this means that
+ the reprint details are introduced by the punctuation command
+ \cmd{origfieldspunct}, which is preset to a comma.
+ \item The punctuation before \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon}
+ and \texttt{maintitleaddon} is controlled by the new command
+ \cmd{titleaddonpunct}. The default is a period.
+ \item The\beschreibung{edsuper} option \option{edsuper} is introduced. If it is set to \wert{true},
+ the edition is printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number)
+ straight ahead of the year. The default value for this option is
+ \wert{false}.\\
+ \achtung Note that this works only, if you have integers in the field
+ \texttt{edition}, and nothing but integers. Information like
+ \enquote{5th, revised and expanded edition} in the \texttt{edition}
+ field will be printed as usual, not as a superscript number.
+ Additionally, a warning will appear. If you would like to use the
+ option \option{edsuper} for one of your documents, you should ensure
+ that you put only integers into the \texttt{edition} field and use the
+ field \texttt{note} for more detailed information on editions.
+ \item The\beschreibung{editorstring} option \option{editorstring} is introduced. It can take the values
+ \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{normal}; the default is
+ \wert{parens}. This option sets the string \enquote{editor}
+ (abbreviated \enquote{ed.}) in parentheses or in brackets. If you set
+ the option to \wert{normal}, the editor string is not
+ surrounded by parentheses or brackets. Instead, a comma is added after
+ the editor's name.
+ If \option{usetranslator=true} is used, the setting for
+ \option{editorstring} is also valid for the string
+ \enquote{translator} (abbreviated \enquote{trans.}).
+ \item If\beschreibung{shortjournal} the option \option{shortjournal} is set to \wert{true}, the
+ field \texttt{shortjournal} is used instead of \texttt{journaltitle}.
+ This is useful for journal abbreviations.
+ \item If the \texttt{volume} field is not present for a journal, the
+ \texttt{year} is \emph{not} printed in parenthesis: \enquote{Journal
+ name 2008}. But if the \texttt{month} field is set (or the \texttt{date} field
+ contains a month, e.g. \texttt{2008-03}), the date is
+ separated from the journal title by an additional comma.
+ \item The\beschreibung{journalnumber} option \option{journalnumber} allows you to adjust the position of
+ a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard}, the behaviour of the
+ standard styles is used, but you can configure the separator between
+ \texttt{volume} and \texttt{number} with the new command
+ \cmd{jourvolnumsep} (default: \cmd{adddot}). With \wert{afteryear} the
+ number is printed after the \texttt{year} and introduced by the
+ command \cmd{journumstring}: \enquote{Journal name 28 (2008), no.~2}.
+ The value \wert{date} assures that the date is printed, even if the
+ field \texttt{issue} is given (this is not the case in the standard
+ styles).
+ Additionally, \option{journalnumber=date} prints the number before the
+ date, if the date (at least year and month) is given, but it prints
+ the number after the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date
+ contains only a year). See section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on
+ page~\pageref{journalnumberdate} for details. The default for
+ \option{journalnumber} is \wert{standard}.
+ \item The command \cmd{journumstring} introduces the journal number.
+ The standard is \wert{, no.~}. The command can be redefined,
+ e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The command \cmd{jourvolstring} introduces the journal volume.
+ The standard is a space. The command can be redefined, e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+ \addspace vol\adddot\space}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The fields \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} are put in
+ parentheses.
+ \item The\beschreibung{series} option \option{series} affects the position of the \texttt{series}
+ field. If set to \wert{afteryear}, the series is printed after the
+ year. This affects the entry types \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@inbook},
+ \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@proceedings},
+ \texttt{@inproceedings} and \texttt{@manual}. The standard value for
+ this option is \wert{standard}.
+ \item The command \cmd{seriespunct} is the punctuation before the
+ \texttt{series} (of a book etc.). This punctuation is set inside the
+ parentheses. You can set it e.g. to \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} which is
+ common in some fields. The default is empty, i.e.\ the series is
+ printed right after the opening round bracket.
+ \item The command \cmd{sernumstring} is the punctuation between the
+ \texttt{series} (of a book etc.) and its \texttt{number}. The default
+ is \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. You can easily redefine it, e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ This would give \enquote{(Name of Series, vol. N)}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{annotation} option \option{annotation} is introduced. If it is set to
+ \wert{true}, the field \texttt{annotation} will be printed in
+ \textit{\small small italic} typeface at the end of the entry. The
+ default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+ You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The\beschreibung{library} option \option{library} is introduced. If it is set to
+ \wert{true}, the field \texttt{library} will be printed in
+ {\small\sffamily small sans serif} typeface at the end of the entry.
+ The default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+ You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item If both \option{annotation} and \option{library} are set to
+ \wert{true}, the contents of the \texttt{annotation} field is placed
+ before the contents of the \texttt{library} field.
+ \item In normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@inreference} is an alias for
+ \texttt{@incollection} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used
+ for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. The output is similar to
+ that of an \texttt{@incollection}, but there are some differences:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The title is enclosed in quotes.
+ \item The bibliography string \enquote{inrefstring} (standard:
+ \enquote{article}\slash\enquote{art.}) is put in front
+ of the title.
+ \item The location is not printed.
+ \item With a \texttt{volume} present, the output is e.g. \enquote{in:
+ Encyclopedia 2 (1990), p. 120.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ The \texttt{@reference} entry type still is an alias to \texttt{@collection}.
+ Thus, you can use either \texttt{@collection} or \texttt{@reference} for
+ a work of reference.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Appearance in citations}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the string
+ \enquote{ibidem} unless the citation is the first one on
+ the current page.
+ \item In citations of the same author\slash editor as the
+ immediately preceding citation the name is replaced by
+ the string \enquote{idem} unless the citation is the first
+ one on the current page. This feature is controled by the
+ \bl{} option \option{idemtracker} which is set to \wert{constrict}. If
+ you would like to switch off the idem functionality, you can use
+ \option{idemtracker=false}. For more information on the
+ \option{idemtracker} option see the \bl{} manual.
+ \item If you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}, immediately
+ repeated citations are no longer replaced by the string
+ \enquote{ibidem}, but the \enquote{idem} functionality
+ is still active as long as you do not set the option
+ \option{idemtracker=false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{shorthandibid} option \option{shorthandibid} controls whether
+ immediately repeated citations with a \texttt{shorthand}
+ should also be replaced by the string \enquote{ibidem} or
+ not. Possible values are \wert{true} and \wert{false},
+ the default value is \wert{true}. Note that this option has
+ no effect if you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}.
+ Note also that this behaviour can be overridden
+ for each entry by using \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=true\}} or
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=false\}}, respectively.
+ \item With\beschreibung{omiteditor} \option{useeditor=false} and \option{omiteditor=true}, the editor
+ in citations will be omitted. The same applies to the short citations in
+ the bibliography, if the xref functionality is in use. With
+ \option{useeditor=true}, the option \option{omiteditor} has
+ no effect. The standard for this option is \wert{false}.
+ \item With\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+ the option \option{edstringincitations=true}, the editor and
+ translator strings are shown in citations (not only in the full
+ citations). The appearance depends on how the option \option{editorstring}
+ is set. The default value for this option is \wert{true}.
+ \item If you use the \cmd{textcite} command with an entry that
+ lacks author and editor, \bl{} will give you a warning
+ and output the entry's key in bold face.
+ \item The\beschreibung{firstfull} option \option{firstfull} delivers a full citation for the first
+ occurence of an entry. The default value for this option is
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item If\beschreibung{citedas} a \texttt{shorthand} is given and the option \option{firstfull}
+ is set to \wert{true}, the addition \enquote{henceforth
+ cited as~\ldots} will be added to the citation. This behaviour can
+ be influenced by the option \option{citedas}, which can take
+ the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default
+ is \wert{true}. Note that this behaviour can also be overridden
+ for each entry by using \texttt{options\,= \{citedas=true\}} or
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}, respectively.
+ \item If\beschreibung{herename} you specify pages to a \cmd{fullcite} (or the first citation with
+ the option \option{firstfull}) of an entry which has
+ the field \texttt{pages} defined, the pages of the citation will
+ be preluded by the term \enquote{here}. This behaviour can be
+ influenced by the option \option{herename}, which can take
+ the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the standard value
+ is \wert{true}.
+ The term can be redefined in the preamble by the following command,
+ e.g. in order to have a colon after \enquote{here}:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+ herename = {here\addcolon\space}
+}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item With \option{herename=true}, the punctuation before the \enquote{herename}
+ is determined by the command \cmd{herenamepunct}. The default is
+ \wert{\cmd{add\-comma}\cmd{space}}.
+ \item If\beschreibung{omitpages} you set the option \option{omitpages} to \wert{true}, the page range
+ of \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and
+ \texttt{@inproceedings} entries will be suppressed in full citations.
+ With \option{herename=true}, the \enquote{herename} will be omitted as
+ well. The standard value for this option is \wert{false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{firstfullname} option \option{firstfullname=true} offers the possibility to have
+ authors\slash editors printed with first name and last name for the
+ first citation when using the commands \cmd{citeauthor} or
+ \cmd{textcite}; only when they are cited for the second time, the last
+ name is printed on its own. This works also with different citations
+ from the same author such as the full name is only given with the
+ first citation. It does not matter, if you only use \cmd{citeauthor}
+ or {textcite} or both. The standard for this option is \wert{false}
+ (i.e. only the last names are printed).
+ \item If\beschreibung{singletitle} you use the \bl{} option \option{singletitle=true}, the title of
+ a cited work is only printed if there is more than one work of the same
+ author. See the biblatex documentation for details.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{List of Shorthands}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The\beschreibung{terselos} list of shorthands contains only author (or editor), title and,
+ if necessary, booktitle or maintitle. This information should be
+ sufficient in order to find the full bibliographical data in the
+ bibliography. This feature is controled by the
+ option \option{terselos} which can be set to \wert{true} or
+ \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+ \item Using\beschreibung{shorthandwidth} the option \option{shorthandwidth}, you can define the width of
+ the labels in the list of shorthands. This is especially useful when
+ you have very long shorthands. The option can take any length
+ definition for example \wert{40pt} or \wert{3em}. \achtung If you use
+ the option \option{shorthandwidth}, the spacing after the label is
+ reduced and a colon is inserted after every label. The punctuation
+ mark can be redefined with the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} and the
+ spacing is assigned by the new length \cmd{shorthandsep}. The standard
+ values (as soon as \option{shorthandwidth} is used) are:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{The \xbx{footnote-dw} style}
+
+This style is similar to \xbx{verbose-inote}. It is based on the
+\xbx{authortitle-dw} style. Thus, you can use all options defined in
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}; the only exception is the option \option{firstfull}.
+Besides, there are the following differences between \xbx{footnote-dw} and
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}:
+\medskip
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Citations are \emph{only} possible inside footnotes. Citations
+ which are not inside footnotes will automatically be turned into
+ a \cmd{footcite}.
+ \item The first citation will give a full reference, following citations
+ will only use \texttt{author} and \texttt{shorttitle} (or
+ \texttt{title}, if no \texttt{shorttitle} is given) with the
+ addition \enquote{see n.~\enquote{N}}, where \enquote{N} is
+ the number of the footnote where the first citation occured.
+ \item The\beschreibung{pageref} option \option{pageref} known from \bl's \xbx{verbose-note} and
+ \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} styles is also available. When set to \wert{true},
+ the page number is added to the footnote number pointing to the full
+ citation if it is located on a different page. This option defaults to
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item When using \cmd{parencite} outside a footnote, the parentheses
+ will be dropped and a \cmd{footcite} will be used instead. Inside
+ footnotes, the \cmd{parencite} command will work as expected. The
+ addition \enquote{see n.~\ldots} will be surrounded by brackets
+ instead of parentheses.
+ \item The \cmd{textcite} command is not defined and will be
+ replaced by a \cmd{cite} command.
+ \item If one or both of the options \option{annotation} and \option{library}
+ are set to \wert{true}, the annotations and library information
+ are only printed in the bibliography (if there is one), but not in the
+ first citations and in the list of shorthands.
+ \item The option \option{herename} is valid for full citations
+ (\cmd{fullcite}) as well as for the first citation of an entry.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Crossref functionality}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{How it works}
+The\beschreibung{xref} crossref functionality of \bldw{} provides a possibility for
+dependent papers to refer to a parent entry. In order to use it, you
+have to create a parent entry of the type \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+or \texttt{@proceedings}. Each child entry belonging to this parent entry can
+refer to its \BibTeX\ key using the field \texttt{xref}. This works for entries
+of the type \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Here is a small example:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+ editor = {(*\emph{Editor}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Book Title}*)},
+ location = {(*\emph{Location}*)},
+ date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+ author = {(*\emph{Author}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Title of the Contribution}*)},
+ xref = {parent}% reference
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When an \texttt{@incollection} entry is cited and the option \option{xref} is set
+to \wert{true}, the cited entry takes data of the entry with
+the \BibTeX\ key \texttt{parent}. If it is available, the \texttt{shorthand}
+is used. Otherwise, the fields \texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} and \texttt{title}
+(or \texttt{shorttitle}, if available) are printed. Thus, the reader is
+referred to the corresponding parent entry in the bibliography and in this way
+is provided with all relevant data.
+
+With multiple child entries, it would be possible to have the data entered only
+once (and thus, also the possibility to have typos would be reduced). But you
+have to keep in mind that you then \emph{always} have to use this crossref
+mechanism. If you need a document with all data in every single entry, the corresponding
+information (\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) would be missing. It is
+therefore better to enter all relevant data for \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook}
+and \texttt{@inproceedings} entries including the \BibTeX{} key of the parent
+entry in the \texttt{xref} field.
+
+The behaviour of the \texttt{xref} field is affected by the package option
+\option{mincrossrefs}, which has the default setting \wert{2}. That means, if only
+one article of a collection is cited, the collection would not be included in the
+bibliography (if it is not cited explicitly) and thus the article would be incomplete.
+For that reason, the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set to \wert{1} when using
+\option{xref=true}.
+
+The default setting does not use this crossref functionality. You can also switch
+it off with \option{xref=false}. In both cases, the \texttt{xref} field takes effect
+only insofar as the parent entry is only included in the bibliography if at least
+two of his child entries are cited (\option{mincrossrefs=2}). You can of course set
+the value for \option{mincrossrefs} to whatever you want or need.
+
+\achtung{}The reference only works with the field \texttt{xref}. The field \texttt{crossref}
+does \emph{not} work together with this crossref functionality! Instead of simply
+copying the missing fields from the parent entry into the child entry, as it is
+done in standard \BibTeX\ and its crossref method, the crossref functionality
+presented here uses a special citation which provides the relevant data of the
+parent entry.
+
+\subsection{Peculiarities}
+\subsubsection{\xbx{footnote-dw} specifics}
+The crossref functionality also works with \xbx{footnote-dw}. When using the option
+\option{xref=true}, citing the parent entry for the first time sets a \cmd{label}
+for the parent entry. It does not matter if the parent entry is cited itself or via
+a child entry. When a (second) child entry is cited, a short citation of the parent
+entry is given along with a reference to the footnote of the first citation in which the
+parent entry appeared.
+
+\subsubsection{Multi-volume \enquote{parents}}
+If a parent enry is a multi-volume work, the child entry normally refers to
+a specific volume of the parent entry, not to the entire work. In order to
+take that into account, \bldw{} checks if the \texttt{volume} field is given
+in the child entry. If so, it checks if the parent entry has a \texttt{volume},
+too. Only if the parent entry has no \texttt{volume} specified, the volume of
+the child entry is printed immediately before the pages.%
+\footnote{The reason why it is not checked if the content of both \texttt{volume}
+fields are the same is the following: As soon as the \texttt{volume} field of
+the parent entry is given, it represents a single volume of a multi-volume work.
+If we now have a child entry with a different \texttt{volume}, it can be considered
+as a fault. At least no scenario came to my mind where a child entry needs a different
+volume as the correpsonding parent entry.} In this case, it will also be checked
+if the data in the \texttt{date} field match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published in several years), the year will be printed
+additionally. Moreover, it will finally be checked if the data in the field
+\texttt{location} (or \texttt{address}) match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published at different places, but the single volume referred to
+by the child entry was published only at one place), the location will be printed
+immediately before the year.
+
+\section{Survey of options}
+\subsection{Global options}
+The value in parentheses shows the default.
+
+ \optlist{acronyms}{false}
+ Only if set to \wert{true}, the entry option \option{acronym} will be regarded.
+ \optlist{annotation}{false}
+ The field \texttt{annotation} is printed at the end of the bibliography
+ item.
+ \optlist{citedas}{true}
+ The first citation (in \xbx{authortitle-dw} only if the option
+ \option{firstfull} is used) is followed by the string
+ \enquote{henceforth cited as} whenever a \texttt{shorthand} is given.
+ \optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+ \enquote{ed. by idem} instead of \enquote{ed. by \emph{Editor}}.
+ \optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+ Sets the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true} also the
+ translator string) in parentheses (\wert{parens}) or brackets
+ (\wert{brackets}). If set to \wert{normal}, the editor string is
+ put after the editor's name and preceded by a comma.
+ \optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+ In citations, the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true}
+ also the translator string) is put after the editor's name (and the
+ translator's name, where appropriate).
+ \optlist{edsuper}{false}
+ The edition is printed as superscript number straight ahead of the year.
+ \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{firstfull}{false}
+ The first citation is printed with full reference.
+ \optlist{firstfullname}{false}
+ At the first citation with \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite} (with
+ footnote-dw: \cmd{citeauthor} only) the full name is printed, at all
+ subsequent citations only the last name is printed.
+ \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the first names of authors and editors as well
+ as of name affixes and (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{false}) of
+ name prefixes. Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic},
+ \wert{bold} and \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the
+ normal font shape is used).
+ \optlist{herename}{true}
+ Specifies if the term \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a
+ fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: only with option
+ \option{firstfull}) of an entry which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field.
+ \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string.
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape
+ is used).
+ \optlist{idembib}{true}
+ \enquote{Idem} or \enquote{---} instead of names for the same
+ authors\slash editors of subsequent entries in the bibliography.
+ \optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+ Only for \option{idembib=true}: With \wert{idem} the names are substituted
+ by \enquote{Idem}, with \wert{dash} they are substituted by
+ a\,---\,well\,---\,dash (\enquote{---}).
+ \optnur[no default]{idemfont}
+ Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{idem} string.
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal}. If this option is not set, the font shape indicated by the
+ option \option{namefont} is used (this is the default behaviour).
+ \optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+ Position of a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard} as in the
+ standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, introduced
+ by the bibliography string \enquote{number} (\enquote{no.}), and with
+ \wert{date} dependent on the date settings (see
+ section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on page~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+ \optlist{library}{false}
+ The field \texttt{library} is printed at the end of the bibliography item.
+ \optlist{namefont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the last names of authors and editors as well
+ as of name prefixes (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{true}).
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape
+ is used).
+ \optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+ The publisher is not printed.
+ \optlist{nolocation}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the location is not printed. In this case, the
+ publisher is omitted, too, even if \option{nopublisher} is set to
+ \wert{false}.
+ \optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+ If set to \wert{false}, the entry option \option{oldauthor} is ignored.
+ \optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the editor is omitted in citations.
+ \optlist{omitpages}{false}
+ Specifies if the pages of a fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}:
+ only with option \option{firstfull}) of an \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook},
+ \texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inproceedings} entry will be printed or not.
+ \optlist{origfields}{true}
+ With \option{origfields=true}, the fields \texttt{origlocation} and
+ \texttt{origdate} (as well as \texttt{origpublisher}, if
+ \option{nopublisher=false} is given) are printed.
+ \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ Specifies the appearance of the reprint details (with
+ \option{origfields=true}): in parentheses, in brackets, or introduced by
+ \cmd{origfieldspunct} (preset to a comma).
+ \optlist[\xbx{footnote-dw} only]{pageref}{false}
+ In addition to the footnote number of the first citation, the page number
+ is referenced.
+ \optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{pagetotal} is printed or not.
+ \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+ If set to \wert{false}, the author of entries with entry option
+ \option{pseudoauthor} are \emph{not} printed.
+ \optlist{series}{standard}
+ Position of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the
+ standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}.
+ \optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+ Immediately repeated citations of entries with \texttt{shorthand} are
+ replaced by \enquote{ibid.}
+ \optnur[no default]{shorthandwidth}
+ Defines the width of the label in the list of shorthands. Additionally,
+ after every label the length \cmd{shorthandsep} (the default is 3pt) and
+ the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} (the default is a colon) are executed.
+ \optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+ With \option{shortjournal=true} the field \texttt{shortjournal} is used
+ instead of \texttt{journaltitle}. If \texttt{shortjournal} is not set,
+ the field \texttt{journaltitle} (and, if available, \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+ is used.
+ \optlist{singletitle}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the title in citations is omitted, unless there is more
+ than one work of the same author. This does not apply to full citations.
+ \optlist{terselos}{true}
+ A terse version of the list of shorthands is used.
+ \optlist{xref}{false}
+ The crossref functionality is used and the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set
+ to \wert{1}. See section~\ref{xreffunctionality} on page~\pageref{xreffunctionality}
+ for details.
+
+\subsection{Entry options}
+ \opt{acronym}
+ The \texttt{shorthands}, with \option{shortjournal=true} also the abbreviated
+ journal titles (\texttt{shortjournal}), are set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro},
+ if the global option \option{acronyms} is set to \wert{true}.
+ \opt{citedas}
+ The string \enquote{henceforth cited as} in first citations
+ (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: with option \option{firstfull} only) of entries
+ with a \texttt{shorthand} is enforced (\wert{true}) or suppressed
+ (\wert{false}).
+ \opt{oldauthor}
+ The author is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont},
+ if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}.
+ \opt{pseudoauthor}
+ The author is printed between \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibright\-pseudo},
+ if the global option \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{true}. With the
+ global option \option{pseudoauthor=false}, the author of entries with the
+ entry option \option{pseudoauthor=true} are not printed at all.
+ \opt{shorthandibid}
+ Independent of the global option \option{shorthandibid}, the shorthand of
+ this entry is replaced by \enquote{ibidem} (\wert{true}) or is not
+ replaced (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl}{biblatex} options}
+The following list shows \bl{} options which are set to a specific value by \bldw{}. You can find more information on these options in the \bl{} documentation.
+
+ \optset{autocite}{footnote}
+ The command \cmd{autocite} is replaced by \cmd{footcite}.
+ \optset{citetracker}{true}
+ The \emph{citation tracker} which checks if a work was already cited before
+ is activated globally.
+ \optset{doi}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{doi} is printed or not.
+ \optset{eprint}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{eprint} is printed or not.
+ \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+ In immediately repeated citations of the same work, the citation is
+ replaced by \enquote{ibid.}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+ \optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+ In immediately repeated citations of the same author, the author's name is
+ replaced by \enquote{idem}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+ \optset{isbn}{false}
+ Whether the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn} are printed or not.
+ \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+ The \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker} which checks if the location of a cited
+ work is the same as the location last cited (of the same work) is switched
+ off.
+ \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+ The \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker} which checks if the work is the same as
+ the one which was last cited by the same author is switched off.
+ \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+ The \emph{page tracker} is switched on; with oneside documents it checks
+ for single pages, with twoside documents it checks for double pages
+ (spreads). The internal tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage}
+ use this option.
+
+\subsection{The option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Better than wasting a lot of words in trying to describe the option, I will
+rather give some examples which show the \BibTeX\ entry and the corresponding
+output with \option{journalnumber=date}. The examples were provided by
+Bernhard Tempel; they are in German, but I think the essentials should be
+clear to the English reader as well.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-19}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Commands and bibliography strings}
+\subsection{Additional commands}
+The following list shows additional commands introduced by \bldw{}, along with their standard definitions. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}.
+
+% \befehl{}{}{}
+ \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Font of the field
+ \texttt{annotation}.}
+ \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Final
+ delimiter between names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's
+ \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+ \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Punctuation after the author when using
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between
+ names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Additional delimiter between
+ first and second name in the bibliography when the scheme
+ \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not
+ meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+ \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Punctuation before the author when using
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Final delimiter between names in
+ citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Delimiter between names in
+ citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{citenamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after names in
+ citations.}
+ \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Additional delimiter between
+ first and second name in citations when the scheme
+ \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not
+ meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{herenamepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation before the
+ \enquote{herename} (before page indications in fullcites of dependent
+ works).}
+ \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+ \cmd{addnbspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the journal number.}
+ \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Punctuation between journal volume and
+ journal number (with \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+ \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the
+ journal volume.}
+ \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Font of the field
+ \texttt{library}.}
+ \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+ and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=true} is
+ in use or the publisher is missing.}
+ \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+ and \texttt{publisher} when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+ \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of
+ the reprint, if the options \option{origfields=true} and
+ \option{origfieldsformat=punct} are set.}
+ \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{publisher}
+ and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+ \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Punctuation before the \texttt{series}, inside the
+ parentheses.}
+ \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string between the
+ \texttt{series} and its \texttt{number}.}
+ \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Puncutation after a shorthand, if
+ \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+ \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Length between the
+ shorthand and its description, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+ \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of
+ \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} and
+ \texttt{maintitle\-addon}.}
+
+\subsection{Additional bibliography strings}
+The following list shows the additional bibliography strings introduced by \bldw{}.
+There is always a long and a short version. It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+ \biblstring{herename}{here}{here}
+ \biblstring{inrefstring}{article}{art\cmd{adddot}}
+\end{labeling}
+The bibliography strings can be redefined as follows (but note that you cannot
+define a long and a short version):
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{%
+ herename = {at},
+ inrefstring = {}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+%\subsection{Redefined bibliography strings}
+%The following list shows the bibliography strings which are defined by \bl{}
+%and redefined by \bldw{}. There is always a long and a short version.
+%It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used.
+%\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+%% \biblstring{}{}{}
+ %\biblstring{idem}{idem}{idem}
+ %\biblstring{idemsm}{idem}{idem}
+ %\biblstring{idemsf}{eadem}{eadem}
+ %\biblstring{idemsn}{idem}{idem}
+ %\biblstring{idempm}{eidem}{eidem}
+ %\biblstring{idempf}{eaedem}{eaedem}
+ %\biblstring{idempn}{eadem}{eadem}
+ %\biblstring{idempp}{eidem}{eidem}
+%\end{labeling}
+
+\section{Further hints}
+The following hints are ideas for advanced users to further customize
+the styles beyond the options that \bldw{} provides.
+
+\subsection{Delimiter between names}
+Other than \bl{}, \bldw\ distinguishes between delimiters that are used in
+citations and delimiters that are used in the bibliography. \bl{} has only
+\cmd{multinamedelim} (between multiple authors), \cmd{finalnamedelim} (before
+the last author) and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} (additional character(s) in
+\enquote{Lastname, Firstname\textbar\ and Firstname2 Lastname2}: the \textbar\
+indicates the place for the \cmd{revsdnamedelim}).
+
+\bldw{}, however, has \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bib\-final\-name\-delim}
+and \cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} for the bibliography as well as
+\cmd{citemultinamedelim}, \cmd{citefinalnamedelim} and
+\cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} for the citations. Furthermore, \cmd{multinamedelim},
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} are used in the list of
+shorthands. Thus, you can achieve different results. The standard definitions
+are as follows:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When you have multiple authors, they are separated by a slash (/) in citations,
+but by comma or (before the last author) by \enquote{and} in the bibliography
+and in the list of shorthands. The definitions for the bibliography and for
+the list of shorthands are the same as with standard \bl{}. You can customize
+these definitions with \cmd{renewcommand*}.
+
+\subsection{Appearance of Shorthands (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+
+In \bl{}, acronyms (e.g. \enquote{\textsc{URL}}) are set in small caps.
+It uses the command \cmd{mkbibacro} which is defined as:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+ {#1}
+ {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+That means: If small caps are available in the used font, acronyms are set
+in small caps, otherwise in normal shape.
+
+Typographically, it is better (at least in my view) to use upper case letters
+which are slightly letterspaced and scaled down. The letterspacing can be
+done with the package \paket{microtype} (if \paket{pdftex} or \paket{pdf\/latex}
+are used). The scaling is provided by the package \paket{scalefnt}. Thus, the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro} could be redefined in the following way:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The values for \cmd{textls} and \cmd{scalefont} can of course be customized to
+your desires or needs.
+
+If a \texttt{shorthand} is an acronym (e.g.\ \enquote{EB} for \emph{Encyclopædia Britannica}),
+you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}} to the entry and use the global
+option \option{acronyms=true}. Then the shorthand will be typeset using the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro}. The same applies to abbreviated journals (e.g.
+\enquote{PP} for \emph{Past and Present}) using the field \texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{PP\}}
+and \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c14588cbf85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b8b83dcd99d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1319 @@
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% Diese Datei enthält die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw
+
+\documentclass[ngerman]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% Präambel
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% Druckversion
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% Bildschirmversion
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Anfang des Dokuments %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} ist eine kleine Sammlung von Zitierstilen
+ für das Paket \bl{} von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum
+ Zitieren und Bibliographieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich
+ und bietet dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen
+ von \bl{} hinausgehen. \bldw{} baut vollständig auf
+ \bl{} auf und benötigt mindestens die Version~0.9 (bitte
+ achten Sie auch auf die Mindestanforderungen von \bl{} selbst).}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Einleitung}
+\subsection{Installation}
+Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF}"=Ordner ihres
+Systems.\footnote{Falls Sie nicht wissen, was das ist, können Sie sich unter
+\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/TDS} bzw.
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html} informieren.} Aktualisieren Sie
+anschließend die \emph{filename database} ihrer \TeX"=Distribution.
+MiK\TeX"=Benutzer können das entweder im Dialog \enquote{Settings} mit der
+Schaltfläche \enquote{Refresh FNDB} erledigen oder von der Kommandozeile aus
+mit dem Befehl \texttt{initexmf -{}-refresh-fndb}. Wenn Sie eine andere
+\LaTeX"=Distribution verwenden, schlagen Sie bitte in der Dokumentation Ihrer
+Distribution nach, wie Sie entsprechend vorgehen müssen. Weitere Informationen:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \small
+ \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/PaketInstallation}
+ \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/Verschiedenes#67}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Benutzung}
+Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-Stile
+beim Laden des Pakets \bl{} eingebunden:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+bzw.
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Stile sind so konstruiert, dass sie stark miteinander verschränkt sind.
+Das bedeutet, dass die Kombination eines \bldw"=Stiles mit einem anderen Stil
+nicht unbedingt möglich sein wird.
+
+ Zusätzliche Optionen, die von diesen Stilen bereitgestellt
+ werden, werden im Folgenden erläutert. Außerdem gibt es
+ die Beispiele \enquote{de-authortitle-dw} und \enquote{de-footnote-dw}
+ im Ordner \texttt{examples}.
+
+\subsection{Fragen und Antworten (FAQ)}
+In der deutschen \TeX"=FAQ, die auf den Internetseiten der Deutschen Anwendervereinigung
+\TeX\ e.\,V. (\DANTE) eingesehen werden kann, sind auch einige häufig gestellte Fragen
+zu \bl{} und \bldw{} beantwortet, abzurufen unter folgender Adresse:\\
+\href{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}%
+ {http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}
+
+Außerdem habe ich für \enquote{\DTK}, die Mitgliederzeitschrift
+von \DANTE, einen einführenden Artikel zu \bl{} geschrieben, den ich auch als PDF
+zum Herunterladen anbiete:\\
+\href{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}%
+ {http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{authortitle-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil basiert auf dem Standardstil \xbx{authortitle}.
+Neben einigen Änderungen in der Zeichensetzung gibt es folgende Unterschiede:
+
+\subsection{Bibliographie}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Die\beschreibung{namefont}
+ Schriftart der Autoren und Herausgeber kann mit den Optionen%
+ \beschreibung{firstnamefont}
+ \option{namefont} und \option{firstnamefont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps}
+ (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder \wert{bold}
+ (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden.
+ Wenn die Option \option{useprefix=true} gesetzt ist, wirkt sich
+ \option{namefont} auch auf das Namenspräfix aus (also \enquote{von},
+ \enquote{de} etc.).
+ Mit \option{useprefix=false} (der Standardeinstellung) hängt das
+ Namenspräfix von der Option \option{firstnamefont} ab, die in jedem
+ Fall
+ das Namenssuffix (den \enquote{Junior}"=Teil) beeinflusst.
+ \item Wird\beschreibung{oldauthor}
+ die Option \option{namefont} benutzt, aber es sollen dennoch
+ einige Namen nicht in der gewählten Schriftform gesetzt werden (z.\,B.
+ mittelalterliche oder antike Autoren), kann im entsprechenden
+ Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}}
+ oder \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} gesetzt werden. Sollen diese
+ mit \texttt{oldauthor} gekennzeichneten Einträge in derselben Schrift
+ gesetzt werden wie die anderen Einträge, kann man die Eintragsoption
+ mit der globalen Option \option{oldauthor=false} überschreiben.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{idemfont}
+ Schriftart von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} (siehe unten)
+ kann mit der Option \option{idemfont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder
+ \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Wird die Option nicht
+ verwendet, so wird der Schriftschnitt der Option \option{namefont}
+ benutzt. Das ist auch das Standardverhalten.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{ibidemfont}
+ Schriftart von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} (siehe unten)
+ kann mit der Option \option{ibidemfont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder
+ \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Der Standard ist
+ \wert{normal}.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{acronyms}
+ Siglen (\texttt{shorthand} und \texttt{shortjournal}) können mit
+ dem\beschreibung{acronym}
+ Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt werden (Standard für diesen Befehl:
+ \textsc{smallcaps}). Dazu setzt man die globale Option \option{acronyms=true}
+ \emph{und} im entsprechenden Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld
+ \texttt{options = \{acronym=true\}}. Zur Anpassung des Befehls
+ \cmd{mkbibacro} siehe auch den Abschnitt \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}}
+ (S.~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}).
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{idembib}
+ der Option \option{idembib} können aufeinanderfolgende Einträge
+ desselben Autors\slash{}Herausgebers in der Bibliographie durch
+ \enquote{Ders.} bzw. \enquote{Dies.} oder durch einen langen Strich
+ (---) ersetzt werden. Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden
+ die Namen auch in aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen gleicher Autoren\slash
+ Herausgeber ausgegeben. Mit \option{idembib=true} wird die Ersetzung
+ eingeschaltet. Das Format lässt sich dann durch die Option\beschreibung{idembibformat}
+ \option{idembibformat} einstellen; sie kann die Werte \wert{idem}
+ (\enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.}) und \wert{dash} (---) annehmen.
+ Das Geschlecht, das bei der Verwendung von \wert{idem} in manchen
+ Sprachen
+ wichtig ist, wird im Feld \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die
+ \bl"=Dokumentation). Der Standard für \option{idembib} ist
+ \wert{true},
+ der Standard für \option{idembibformat} ist \wert{idem}.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{edbyidem}
+ Autor und Herausgeber bei \texttt{@incollection}"~ oder
+ \texttt{@inbook}"=Einträgen dieselben sind, werden ihre Namen nicht
+ wiederholt, sondern durch \enquote{hg.\,v.\,ders.},
+ \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} etc. ersetzt. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+ \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl{}"=Dokumentation).
+ Diese Funktion wird durch die Option \option{edbyidem} kontrolliert,
+ die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen kann;
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{pseudoauthor}
+ der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} kann man Autorennamen
+ in eckige Klammern einschließen oder ganz unterdrücken. Das ist beispielsweise nützlich für
+ Editionen von Werken, deren Autoren nicht genannt werden, aber bekannt
+ sind. Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt
+ (und die Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} benutzt) wird, dann wird der
+ Autor ausgegeben. Dabei wird er von den Befehlen \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo}
+ eingerahmt. Diese Befehle sind standardmäßig leer. Wenn man den Autor beispielsweise in eckigen
+ Klammern haben möchte, muss man die Befehle umdefinieren:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird, werden Autoren
+ von Einträge mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} gar nicht ausgegeben. Der Standard für
+ die globale Option ist \wert{true}.
+ \item In\beschreibung{nopublisher}
+ der Standardeinstellung wird der Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) nicht
+ ausgegeben, sondern nur Ort (\texttt{location}) und Jahr
+ (\texttt{date}). Will man den Verlag ausgeben, muss man die Option
+ \option{nopublisher=false} setzen.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{nolocation}
+ \option{nolocation=true} kann man auch die Ausgabe des Ortes
+ unterdrücken. In diesem Fall wird auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben
+ (unabhängig von der
+ Einstellung von \option{nopublisher}). Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Die Felder \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+ \texttt{issn}\beschreibung{pagetotal} und \texttt{pagetotal} werden mit den Standardeinstellungen
+ nicht ausgegeben. Sie können aber mit den Optionen \option{doi=true},
+ \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (gilt auch für \texttt{isrn}
+ und \texttt{issn}) bzw. \option{pagetotal=true} berücksichtigt werden.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{origfields}
+ der Option \option{origfields} kann man entscheiden, ob man die
+ Felder \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} und
+ \texttt{origdate} ausgeben lassen möchte oder nicht. Der Standard ist
+ \wert{true}. Wenn die Option genutzt wird und das Feld
+ \texttt{origlocation} gesetzt ist, werden die \enquote{orig}"=Felder
+ ausgegeben. In diesem Fall werden dann die Felder \texttt{location},
+ \texttt{publisher} und \texttt{date} in Klammern angefügt, eingeleitet
+ durch den \emph{bibstring} \texttt{reprint} (\enquote{Nachdr.} oder
+ \enquote{Nachdruck}). Dabei werden die Felder \texttt{publisher} und
+ \texttt{origpublisher} nur ausgegeben,
+ wenn die Option \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist.
+ \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Edition eines Werks sich immer auf die
+ ursprüngliche Ausgabe bezieht, da Nachdrucke normalerweise nicht in
+ mehreren Auf"|lagen erscheinen, sondern eine spezifische Auf"|lage
+ erneut veröffentlichen. Wenn die Option \option{edsuper} benutzt wird,
+ erscheint die Auf"|lage also als hochgestellte Zahl vor
+ \texttt{origdate}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{origfieldsformat}
+ der Option \option{origfieldsformat}, die die Werte \wert{parens},
+ \wert{brackets} und \wert{punct} annehmen kann, lässt sich einstellen,
+ wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (bei \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben
+ werden. Mit \wert{parens} oder \wert{brackets} werden sie in runden
+ bzw. eckigen Klammern gesetzt. Der Standard ist \wert{punct}; dabei
+ werden die Angaben durch das Zeichen \cmd{origfieldspunct}
+ eingeleitet, das auf ein Komma voreingestellt ist.
+ \item Die Zeichensetzung vor dem Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon},
+ \texttt{booktitleaddon} und \texttt{maintitleaddon}) wird durch den
+ neuen Befehl \cmd{titleaddonpunct} gesteuert. Der Standard ist ein
+ Punkt.
+ \item Wird\beschreibung{edsuper}
+ die Option \option{edsuper} auf \wert{true} gesetzt, erscheint
+ die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) als hochgestellte Zahl (nicht als
+ Ordnungszahl) direkt vor dem Jahr. Der Standardwert für diese Option
+ ist \wert{false}.\\
+ \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Option \option{edsuper} nur dann
+ funktioniert,
+ wenn im Feld \texttt{edition} \emph{nur} eine Zahl steht. Angaben wie
+ \enquote{5., aktualisierte und ergänzte Aufl.} werden wie sonst auch
+ normal ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig wird in diesem Fall eine Warnung
+ ausgegeben.
+ Will man von der Option \option{edsuper} Gebrauch machen, wird deshalb
+ dringend geraten, in das Feld \texttt{edition} weiterhin nur Zahlwerte
+ einzugeben und für ausführliche Angaben zu Auf"|lagen das Feld
+ \texttt{note} zu verwenden.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{editorstring}
+ Option \option{editorstring} kann die Werte \wert{parens},
+ \wert{brackets} und \wert{normal} annehmen; der Standard ist
+ \wert{parens}. Diese Option setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) in runde Klammern (parens) oder in eckige
+ Klammern (brackets). Wenn die Option den Wert \wert{normal} hat, wird
+ der Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nicht von Klammern umgeben. Stattdessen
+ wird er an den Namen des Herausgebers und ein anschließendes Komma
+ angehängt.
+ Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung
+ von \option{editorstring} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{shortjournal}
+ der Option \option{shortjournal=true} wird statt \texttt{journaltitle}
+ das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} verwendet. Das ist sehr nützlich für
+ Zeitschriftensiglen, die man bei Bedarf einsetzen kann.
+ \item Fehlt bei Zeitschriften die Bandangabe (\texttt{volume}), wird die
+ Jahreszahl \emph{nicht} in Klammern gesetzt:
+ \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 2008}. Falls dagegen das Feld \texttt{month}
+ gesetzt ist (oder das Feld \texttt{date} den entsprechenden Inhalt aufweist, z.\,B.
+ \texttt{2008-03}), wird das Datum vom Zeitschriftennamen durch ein
+ zusätzliches Komma getrennt.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{journalnumber}
+ der Option \option{journalnumber} lässt sich die Position der
+ Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) bei Zeitschriften variieren. Mit dem
+ Wert \wert{afteryear} wird sie nach dem Jahr
+ ausgegeben, eingeleitet durch den Befehl \cmd{journumstring} (siehe
+ unten), also \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 28 (2008), Nr.~2}. Setzt man
+ die Option auf \wert{standard}, wird das Standardverhalten
+ wiederhergestellt, wobei das Zeichen zwischen \texttt{volume} und
+ \texttt{number} mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolnumsep}
+ (Standard: \cmd{adddot}) einstellbar ist. Zusätzlich gibt es noch
+ die Möglichkeit, \option{journalnumber} auf \wert{date} zu setzen.
+ Damit wird gewährleistet, dass das Datum auch dann ausgegeben wird,
+ wenn das Feld \texttt{issue} definiert ist (das ist in den
+ Standard"=Stilen nicht der Fall). Außerdem wird die Heftnummer vor
+ dem Datum ausgegeben, wenn zumindest Jahr (\texttt{year}) und Monat
+ (\texttt{month}) angegeben sind (\texttt{date = \{YYYY-MM\}} ist natürlich
+ ebenfalls möglich). Wenn nur das Jahr gegeben ist,
+ wird die Heftnummer nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Für nähere Einzelheiten
+ zur Option \option{journalnumber=date} siehe
+ Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf
+ Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}. Der Standard für
+ \option{journalnumber} ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{journumstring} wird die Heftnummer von
+ Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist \wert{, Nr.~}. Der
+ Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden,
+ z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolstring} wird die Bandnummer von
+ Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist ein Leerzeichen. Der
+ Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden,
+ z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+ \addspace Jg\adddot\space}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Die Felder \texttt{series} und \texttt{number} werden von
+ Klammern umschlossen.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{series}
+ Option \option{series} bestimmt die Position der Reihe (Feld
+ \texttt{series}). Setzt man sie auf \wert{afteryear}, wird die Reihe
+ nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Das betrifft die Typen \texttt{@book},
+ \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection},
+ \texttt{@proceedings}, \texttt{@inproceedings} und \texttt{@manual}.
+ Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{standard}.
+ \item Der Befehl \cmd{seriespunct} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung vor dem
+ Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}). Das Zeichen wird innerhalb der
+ Klammer gesetzt. Es kann z.\,B. auf \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} eingestellt
+ werden, was in manchen Fächern üblich ist. Standardmäßig ist dieser
+ Befehl leer, d.\,h. der Reihentitel wird direkt nach der öffnenden
+ runden Klammer gesetzt.
+ \item Der Befehl \cmd{sernumstring} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung zwischen dem
+ Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}) und der dazugehörigen Nummer (Feld
+ \texttt{number}). Der Standardwert ist \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. Er kann
+ leicht angepasst werden, z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Das würde \enquote{(Reihentitel, Bd. N)} ergeben.
+ \item Setzt\beschreibung{annotation}
+ man die Option \option{annotation} auf
+ \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{annotation} in
+ \textit{\small kleiner kursiver} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+ ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Setzt\beschreibung{library}
+ man die Option \option{library} auf
+ \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{library} in
+ {\small\sffamily kleiner serifenloser} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+ ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Werden sowohl \option{annotation} als auch \option{library} auf
+ \wert{true} gesetzt, so wird der Inhalt des Feldes \texttt{annotation}
+ vor dem Inhalt des \texttt{library}-Feldes ausgegeben.
+ \item In \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@inreference} ein Alias für
+ \texttt{@incollection}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für
+ Artikel in Nachschlagewerken verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich
+ wie bei \texttt{@incollection}, aber es gibt ein paar Unterschiede:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt.
+ \item Der \textit{bibliography string} \enquote{inrefstring} (Standard:
+ \enquote{Artikel}\slash\enquote{Art.}) wird vor dem Titel ausgegeben.
+ \item Der Ort (Feld \texttt{location}) wird nicht ausgegeben.
+ \item Gibt es eine Bandangabe (Feld \texttt{volume}), so sieht die Ausgabe
+ z.\,B. folgendermaßen aus: \enquote{in: Lexikon 2 (1990), S. 120.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ Der Eintragstyp \texttt{@reference} bleibt ein Alias zu \texttt{@collection}.
+ Damit kann also sowohl \texttt{@collection} als auch \texttt{@reference} für
+ Nachschlagewerke (Lexika, Wörterbücher etc.) verwendet werden.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Zitate im Text}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate werden durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt,
+ sofern das Zitat nicht das erste der aktuellen Seite ist.
+ \item Folgen zwei unterschiedliche Zitate desselben Autors\slash
+ Herausgebers direkt aufeinander, wird der Name im zweiten Zitat durch
+ \enquote{Ders.} oder \enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, sofern das Zitat nicht
+ das erste der aktuellen Seite ist. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+ \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl"=Dokumentation).
+ Diese Funktion wird durch die \bl"=Option \option{idemtracker}
+ kontrolliert, die auf \wert{constrict} gesetzt ist. Wer sie abschalten
+ möchte, verwendet \option{idemtracker=false}. Für weitere Informationen
+ zu dieser Option wird auf die \bl"=Dokumentation verwiesen.
+ \item Wenn die \bl{}"=Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt
+ wird, werden direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate nicht durch
+ \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt; die \enquote{idem}-Funktionalität bleibt aber
+ erhalten, solange nicht die Option \option{idemtracker} auf \wert{false}
+ gesetzt wird.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{shorthandibid}
+ Option \option{shorthandibid} kontrolliert, ob direkt
+ aufeinanderfolgende Zitate mit einer Sigle (\texttt{shorthand})
+ ebenfalls durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt werden sollen oder nicht.
+ Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind \wert{true} und \wert{false},
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}. Diese Option hat keinerlei Effekt,
+ wenn die Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.\\
+ Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden
+ mit \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid=""true\}} oder
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid""=false\}}. Die globale
+ Einstellung wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{omiteditor}
+ man die Option \option{useeditor} auf \wert{false} setzt, kann man
+ mit \option{omiteditor=true} erreichen, dass der Herausgeber in
+ Literaturverweisen unterdrückt wird. Dasselbe gilt auch für Kurzverweise
+ in der Bibliographie, sofern man \option{xref=true} verwendet.
+ Mit \option{useeditor=true} hat die Option \option{omiteditor} keine
+ Auswirkung. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+ der Option \option{edstringincitations=true} werden Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{edi\-tor}) und Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) bei jedem
+ Literaturverweis mit den entsprechenden Kürzeln versehen, nicht nur
+ bei Vollzitaten. Das Erscheinungsbild richtet sich dabei nach der
+ Einstellung der Option \option{editorstring}. Der Standardwert für
+ diese Option ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Wenn der Befehl \cmd{textcite} mit einem Eintrag benutzt wird, der
+ weder einen Autor (\texttt{author}) noch einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor})
+ hat, gibt \bl{} eine Warnung aus und setzt den \BibTeX{}-Key des
+ Eintrags in fetter Schrift in den Text.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{firstfull}
+ der Option \option{firstfull} kann man für das erste Zitat die
+ volle Literaturangabe ausgeben lassen. Der Standard für diese Option ist
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{citedas}
+ es eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) gibt, wird bei \option{firstfull=true}
+ dem Erstzitat der Zusatz \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+ Dies kann durch die Option \option{citedas} beeinflusst werden.
+ Sie kann die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen;
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+ Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden mit
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=true\}} oder
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}. Die globale Einstellung
+ wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.
+ \item Wird\beschreibung{herename}
+ bei einem Vollzitat (\cmd{fullcite} oder Erstzitat mit der Option
+ \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit Seitenangaben auch im
+ Zitat eine Seitenangabe gemacht, wird diese durch \enquote{hier}
+ eingeleitet. Dies kann durch die Option \option{herename}
+ beeinflusst werden, die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false}
+ annehmen kann; der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+ Der Ausdruck kann mit folgendem Befehl in der Präambel umdefiniert
+ werden, z.\,B. um einen Doppelpunkt nach \enquote{hier} zu haben:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+ herename = {hier\addcolon\space}
+}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Mit der Option \option{herename=true} wird die Zeichensetzung vor dem
+ \enquote{herename} durch den Befehl \cmd{herenamepunct} bestimmt. Der
+ Standard ist \wert{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}, also ein Komma gefolgt
+ von einem Leerzeichen.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{omitpages}
+ der Option \option{omitpages=true} werden die Seitenangaben von
+ Einträgen der Typen \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} und
+ \texttt{@inproceedings} in Vollzitaten nicht ausgegeben. Nutzt man
+ gleichzeitig die Option \option{herename=true}, wird auch der \enquote{herename}
+ unterdrückt. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{firstfullname}
+ der Option \option{firstfullname=true} hat man die Möglichkeit, beim ersten
+ Zitieren eines Autors\slash Herausgebers mit dem Befehl \cmd{citeauthor}
+ oder mit dem Befehl \cmd{textcite} automatisch den vollen Namen
+ ausgeben zu lassen; erst beim zweiten Zitieren wird dann nur der Nachname
+ ausgegeben. Das funktioniert auch bei unterschiedlichen Literaturverweisen
+ desselben Autors, so dass auch dann der volle Name nur beim ersten Verweis
+ ausgegeben wird. Dabei ist es egal, ob man nur \cmd{citeauthor}, nur \cmd{textcite}
+ oder beide Befehle gemischt einsetzt. Der Standard für diese Option ist
+ \wert{false} (d.\,h., es wird immer nur der Nachname ausgegeben).
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{singletitle}
+ der \bl"=Option \option{singletitle=true} wird der Titel eines Werkes
+ nur dann ausgegeben, wenn mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+ Für weitere Informationen sehen Sie bitte in der \bl"=Dokumentation nach.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection[Sigelverzeichnis]{Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Das\beschreibung{terselos}
+ Sigelverzeichnis enthält in der Standardeinstellung lediglich
+ Autor (oder Herausgeber), Titel und gegebenenfalls Buchtitel bzw. bei
+ mehrbändigen Werken den Gesamttitel. Diese Angaben sollten ausreichen,
+ um die vollständigen Daten in der Bibliographie zu finden. Dieses
+ Verhalten wird durch die Option \option{terselos} gesteuert, die
+ die Werte \wert{true} und \wert{false} annehmen kann; der Standard
+ ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandwidth}
+ der Option \option{shorthandwidth} kann man die Breite der Label
+ im Sigelverzeichnis angeben. Das ist vor allem nützlich, wenn man sehr
+ lange Sigel hat. Die Option kann alle gängigen Längenwerte annehmen,
+ also beispielsweise \wert{40pt} oder \wert{3em}. \achtung Wenn man die
+ Option \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt, wird der Abstand nach dem Label
+ reduziert und gleichzeitig ein Doppelpunkt nach dem Label angefügt.
+ Das Trennzeichen lässt sich durch den Befehl \cmd{shorthandpunct}
+ umdefinieren, der Abstand wird durch die neue Länge \cmd{shorthandsep}
+ festgelegt. Die Standardwerte (sobald \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt
+ wird) sind:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil ähnelt dem Stil \xbx{verbose-inote}. Er basiert auf
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}, so dass auch alle Optionen, die von \xbx{authortitle-dw} definiert werden, mit \xbx{footnote-dw} benutzt werden können, mit Ausnahme der
+Option \option{firstfull}. Daneben gibt es folgende Unterschiede:
+\medskip
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Zitate sind \emph{nur} innerhalb von Fußnoten möglich. Zitate
+ außerhalb von Fußnoten werden automatisch zu einem \cmd{footcite}
+ geändert.
+ \item Das erste Zitat eines Eintrags gibt die volle Literaturangabe aus,
+ alle weiteren Zitate desselben Eintrags werden nur durch den
+ Autor (\texttt{author}) und den Kurztitel (\texttt{shorttitle})
+ repräsentiert, bzw. durch den Titel (\texttt{title}), falls kein
+ Kurztitel definiert wurde. Ergänzt wird die Angabe durch den
+ Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\enquote{N}}, wobei \enquote{N} für
+ die Nummer der Fußnote steht, in der das Werk zuerst zitiert
+ wurde.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{pageref}
+ Option \option{pageref}, die es auch in den \bl"=Stilen
+ \xbx{verbose-note} und \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} gibt, ist ebenfalls
+ verfügbar. Setzt man sie auf \wert{true}, wird die Seite, auf der
+ das erste Zitat erscheint, zur Fußnotennummer, die auf das erste
+ Zitat verweist, hinzugefügt, sofern es sich nicht auf derselben
+ Seite befindet. Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Wird \cmd{parencite} außerhalb einer Fußnote benutzt, werden keine
+ Klammern gesetzt, sondern stattdessen der Befehl \cmd{footcite}
+ ausgeführt. Innerhalb einer Fußnote funktioniert \cmd{parencite}
+ wie erwartet. Der Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\ldots} wird dann von
+ eckigen Klammern eingeschlossen, nicht von runden Klammern.
+ \item Der Befehl \cmd{textcite} ist nicht definiert und wird durch
+ \cmd{cite} ersetzt.
+ \item Sind die Optionen \option{annotation} und \option{library} (oder eine
+ von ihnen) auf \wert{true} gesetzt, werden die Anmerkungen
+ (\texttt{annotation}) und Bibliotheksinformationen (\texttt{library})
+ nur in der Bibliographie ausgegeben (falls eine vorhanden ist), nicht
+ aber im Erstzitat und in der Sigelliste.
+ \item Die Option \option{herename} hat sowohl f"ur Vollzitate
+ (\cmd{fullcite}) als auch für das jeweilige Erstzitat eines Eintrags
+ Gültigkeit.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Die Querverweis-Funktionalität}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{Funktionsweise}
+Mit\beschreibung{xref} der Querverweis"=Funktionalität von \bldw{} können unselbständige
+Schriften auf einen \enquote{Eltern"=Eintrag} verweisen.
+Dazu wird in der bib-Datei ein Eltern"=Eintrag des Typs \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+oder \texttt{@proceedings} angelegt. Jeder \enquote{Kind"=Eintrag}, der sich auf diesen
+Eltern"=Eintrag bezieht, verweist mit dem Feld \texttt{xref} auf den \BibTeX"=key des
+Eltern"=Eintrags. Das funktioniert für Einträge der Typen \texttt{@inbook},
+\texttt{@incollection} und \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Zur Veranschaulichung ein kleines Beispiel:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+ editor = {(*\emph{Herausgeber}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Buchtitel}*)},
+ location = {(*\emph{Ort}*)},
+ date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+ author = {(*\emph{Autor}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Titel des Beitrags}*)},
+ xref = {parent}% Verweis
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Wenn nun der \texttt{@incollection}"=Eintrag zitiert und die Option \option{xref} auf
+\wert{true} gesetzt wird, werden automatisch
+Daten aus dem Eintrag mit dem \BibTeX"=key \texttt{parent} übernommen. Dabei wird das Feld
+\texttt{shorthand} genutzt, sofern es vorhanden ist. Ansonsten werden die Felder
+\texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} und \texttt{title} (bzw. \texttt{shorttitle},
+falls vorhanden) ausgegeben. Damit wird der Leser auf den entsprechenden Eltern"=Eintrag
+im Literaturverzeichnis verwiesen und hat alle relevanten Daten, ohne dass sie
+mehrfach aufgeführt werden.
+
+Bei mehreren Kind"=Einträgen wäre es möglich, die Daten nicht mehrfach in die
+\BibTeX-Datei einzugeben (was auch die Möglichkeit von Tippfehlern reduzieren könnte).
+Allerdings sollte man sich bewusst sein, dass man dann \emph{immer} auf die
+Verweistechnik angewiesen ist. Sollte man einmal ein Dokument benötigen, in dem
+immer vollständige Einträge vorhanden sein sollen, würden die entsprechenden Daten
+(\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) fehlen. Deshalb ist es besser, auch
+bei \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} und \texttt{@inproceedings} immer
+die vollständigen Daten einzugeben und auf den Eltern"=Eintrag selbst mit dem
+\texttt{xref}"=Feld zu verweisen.
+
+Das \texttt{xref}"=Feld beachtet die Paketoption \option{mincrossrefs},
+die in der Standardeinstellung auf \wert{2} steht. Das heißt, wenn aus einem
+Sammelband nur ein einziger Beitrag zitiert wird, würde der Sammelband selbst nicht in das
+Literaturverzeichnis aufgenommen werden (es sei denn, er würde selbst explizit
+zitiert) und die Literaturangabe des Beitrags wäre nicht vollständig. Aus diesem Grund
+wird bei \option{xref=true} die Option \option{mincrossrefs} auf \wert{1} gesetzt.
+
+In der Standardeinstellung (oder mit \option{xref=false}) wird diese Verweistechnik
+nicht genutzt. Das \texttt{xref}-Feld kommt in diesem Fall nur insoweit zum Tragen, dass ein
+Eltern"=Eintrag nur dann als eigenständiger Eintrag im Literaturverzeichnis aufgeführt
+wird, wenn mindestens zwei seiner Kind"=Einträge zitiert wurden (\option{mincrossrefs=2}).
+Der Wert für \option{mincrossrefs} lässt sich natürlich individuell anpassen.
+
+\achtung{}Der Verweis funktioniert nur mit dem \texttt{xref}"=Feld. Mit dem Feld
+\texttt{crossref} arbeitet diese Verweistechnik \emph{nicht} zusammen! Anders als
+bei der Benutzung des Feldes \texttt{crossref} in herkömmlichem \BibTeX{}
+werden die fehlenden Felder nämlich nicht einfach in den Kind"=Eintrag importiert.
+Stattdessen wird ein spezieller Zitierbefehl ausgeführt, der die entsprechenden
+Daten des Eltern"=Eintrags liefert.
+
+\subsection{Besonderheiten}
+\subsubsection{Verwendung mit \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität arbeitet auch mit dem Stil \xbx{footnote-dw} zusammen.
+Wenn man die Option \option{xref=true} verwendet, wird beim ersten Zitat des
+Eltern"=Eintrags ein \cmd{label} gesetzt. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob der
+Eltern"=Eintrag selbst oder durch einen Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wurde. Sobald ein
+(zweiter) Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wird, wird ein Kurzzitat des Eltern"=Eintrags mit einem Verweis
+auf die Fußnote des ersten Zitats, in dem der Eltern"=Eintrag vorkam, ausgegeben.
+
+\subsubsection{Mehrbändige \enquote{Eltern}}
+Wenn ein Eltern"=Eintrag ein mehrbändiges Werk ist, bezieht sich der
+Kind"=Eintrag normalerweise auf einen bestimmten Band des Eltern"=Eintrags und
+nicht auf den gesamten Eintrag. Um das zu berücksichtigen, wird zunächst
+überprüft, ob im Kind-Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume} vorhanden ist. Wenn dies
+der Fall ist, wird überprüft, ob im Eltern"=Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume}
+ebenfalls vorhanden ist. Nur wenn das nicht der Fall ist, wird die Bandangabe
+des Kind"=Eintrags unmittelbar vor der Seitenangabe ausgegeben.%
+\footnote{Der Grund, warum auf das bloße Vorhandensein
+des \texttt{volume}"=Feldes und nicht auf die Übereinstimmung geprüft wird, ist folgender:
+Sobald das Feld \texttt{volume} des Eltern"=Eintrags vorhanden ist, handelt es sich
+um einen Einzelband eines mehrbändigen Werkes. Ist nun beim Kind"=Eintrag ein anderer
+Band im \texttt{volume}"=Feld angegeben, wird es sich um einen Fehler handeln. Mir ist
+jedenfalls kein Szenario eingefallen, bei dem ein Kind"=Eintrag eine andere Bandangabe
+erforderte als der dazugehörige Eltern"=Eintrag.} In diesem Fall wird gleichzeitig
+geprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{date} übereinstimmen. Ist dies nicht der Fall
+(wenn etwa das mehrbändige Werk über mehrere Jahre erschienen ist), wird zusätzlich
+zur Bandangabe auch das Erscheinungsjahr ausgegeben. Außerdem wird dann schließlich
+auch noch überprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{location} (oder \texttt{address})
+übereinstimmen. Tun sie das nicht (etwa wenn das mehrbändige Werk an unterschiedlichen
+Orten erschienen ist, der konkrete Band, auf den sich der Kind"=Eintrag bezieht, aber nur
+in einem Ort), wird vor dem Erscheinungsjahr auch noch der Erscheinungsort ausgegeben.
+
+\section{Die Optionen im Überblick}
+
+\subsection{Globale Optionen}
+Der Wert in Klammern gibt den Standard an.
+ \optlist{acronyms}{false}
+ Nur wenn man die Option auf \wert{true} setzt, wird die Eintragsoption
+ \option{acronym} beachtet.
+ \optlist{annotation}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{annotation} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der
+ Bibliographie ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{citedas}{true}
+ Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} wird dem Erstzitat (bei
+ \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) ein
+ \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+ \optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+ \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} statt \enquote{hg.\.v. \emph{Herausgeber}}.
+ \optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+ Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+ auch \enquote{Übers.}) in runde Klammern (\wert{parens}) oder
+ in eckige Klammern (\wert{brackets}). Mit dem Wert \wert{normal} wird der
+ Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nach dem Namen des Herausgebers und einem
+ angehängten Komma angefügt.
+ \optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+ Setzt im Zitat den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+ auch \enquote{Übers.}) hinter den Herausgeber bzw. Übersetzer.
+ \optlist{edsuper}{false}
+ Die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) wird als hochgestellte Zahl direkt vor
+ dem Jahr ausgegeben.
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{firstfull}{false}
+ Beim ersten Zitat wird die volle Literaturangabe ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{firstfullname}{false}
+ Beim ersten Zitat mit \cmd{citeauthor} oder \cmd{textcite} (bei
+ footnote-dw: nur bei \cmd{citeauthor}) wird der volle Name ausgegeben, bei
+ allen weiteren Zitaten nur der Nachname.
+ \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt der Vornamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, ebenso
+ von Namensaffixen und (mit der Option \option{useprefix=false})
+ Namenspräfixen.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{herename}{true}
+ Bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der
+ Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit Seitenangaben werden die
+ Seitenangaben zum Zitat durch ein \enquote{hier} eingeleitet.
+ \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} fest.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{idembib}{true}
+ \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} oder \enquote{---} statt Namen bei
+ aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen derselben Autoren\slash Herausgeber in der
+ Bibliographie.
+ \optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+ Nur bei Benutzung von \option{idembib=true}: Mit \wert{idem} werden die
+ Namen durch \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, mit \wert{dash}
+ durch einen langen Strich (\enquote{---}).
+ \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{idemfont}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} fest.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal}. Wird die Option nicht gesetzt, so
+ wird der Schriftschnitt von der Option \option{namefont} übernommen (das
+ ist auch die Voreinstellung).
+ \optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+ Position der Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift: bei
+ \wert{standard} wie in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem
+ Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}), eingeleitet durch den bibstring \enquote{number}
+ (\enquote{Nr.}), und bei \wert{date} in Abhängigkeit von den Datumsangaben
+ (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf
+ Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+ \optlist{library}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{library} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der Bibliographie
+ ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{namefont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt der Nachnamen von Autoren und Editoren fest,
+ ebenso von Namenspräfixen (mit der Option \option{useprefix=true}).
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+ Der Verlag wird nicht ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{nolocation}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Ort nicht ausgegeben.
+ Außerdem wird dann auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben,
+ selbst wenn \option{nopublisher} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.
+ \optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, wird die Eintragsoption
+ \option{oldauthor} ignoriert.
+ \optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+ Unterdrückt die Ausgabe des Herausgebers in Literaturverweisen.
+ \optlist{omitpages}{false}
+ Legt fest, ob bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der
+ Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags der Typen \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook},
+ \texttt{@incollection} oder \texttt{@inproceedings} die Seitenangaben ausgegeben
+ werden oder nicht.
+ \optlist{origfields}{true}
+ Mit \option{origfields=true} werden die Felder \texttt{origlocation} und
+ \texttt{origdate} (sowie \texttt{origpublisher}, wenn
+ \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist) ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ Mit dieser Option kann man einstellen, wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (mit
+ \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben werden sollen: in runden
+ (\wert{parens}) oder eckigen (\wert{brackets}) Klammern, oder eingeleitet
+ durch \cmd{origfieldspunct} (Voreinstellung ist ein Komma).
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{footnote-dw}]{pageref}{false}
+ Zusätzlich zur Fußnotennummer wird auch auf die Seitenzahl des ersten Zitats
+ verwiesen.
+ \optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{pagetotal} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden Autoren von Einträgen mit der Eintragsoption
+ \option{pseudoauthor} \emph{nicht} ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{series}{standard}
+ Position der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie
+ in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem Jahr
+ (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}).
+ \optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+ Direkte Folgezitate von Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} werden durch
+ \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt.
+ \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{shorthandwidth}
+ Legt die Breite der Label im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}
+ fest. Gleichzeitig werden nach jedem Label \cmd{shorthandsep}
+ (standardmäßig 3pt) und \cmd{shorthandpunct} (standardmäßig ein
+ Doppelpunkt) ausgeführt.
+ \optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+ Mit \option{shortjournal=true} wird das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} statt des
+ \texttt{journaltitle} ausgewertet. Falls \texttt{shortjournal} nicht
+ vorhanden ist, wird \texttt{journaltitle} (und ggf. \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+ verwendet.
+ \optlist{singletitle}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Titel in Literaturverweisen
+ unterdrückt, falls nicht mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+ Vollzitate sind davon ausgenommen.
+ \optlist{terselos}{true}
+ Es wird ein knapperes Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}
+ ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{xref}{false}
+ Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität wird verwendet und die Option \option{mincrossrefs}
+ auf den Wert \wert{1} gesetzt. Genaueres dazu findet sich
+ im Abschnitt~\ref{xreffunctionality} auf Seite~\pageref{xreffunctionality}.
+
+\subsection{Optionen für einzelne Einträge}
+ \opt{acronym}
+ Die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}, bei \option{shortjournal=true} auch
+ \texttt{shortjournal}) werden mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt,
+ sofern die globale Option \option{acronyms} aktiviert ist.
+ \opt{citedas}
+ Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} nach dem Erstzitat (bei
+ \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) das
+ angefügte \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} erzwingen (\wert{true})
+ bzw. unterdrücken (\wert{false}).
+ \opt{oldauthor}
+ Der Autor wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt
+ gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist.
+ \opt{pseudoauthor}
+ Der Autor wird von \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo} umgeben,
+ sofern die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt ist.
+ Bei globaler Option \option{pseudoauthor=false} wird der Autor von Einträgen
+ mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor=true} gar nicht ausgegeben.
+ \opt{shorthandibid}
+ Bei Einträgen mit Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) wird~-- unabhängig von der
+ globalen Option \option{shorthandibid}~-- bei direkt aufeinanderfolgenden
+ Wiederholungszitaten die Sigle durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt (\wert{true})
+ bzw. nicht ersetzt (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl"=}{biblatex-}Optionen}
+Im Folgenden werden Optionen aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung gestellt und von \bldw{} lediglich auf einen bestimmten Wert voreingestellt werden. Nähere Informationen zu diesen Optionen sind der \bl"=Dokumentation zu entnehmen.
+
+ \optset{autocite}{footnote}
+ Für den Befehl \cmd{autocite} wird ein \cmd{footcite} ausgeführt.
+ \optset{citetracker}{true}
+ Der \emph{citation tracker}, der überprüft, ob ein Werk bereits zitiert
+ wurde, wird global aktiviert.
+ \optset{doi}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{doi} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{eprint}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{eprint} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+ Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Werks wird \enquote{ebd.} ausgegeben.
+ Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig voneinander behandelt.
+ \optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+ Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Autors wird dessen Name durch
+ \enquote{ders.} ersetzt. Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig
+ voneinander behandelt.
+ \optset{isbn}{false}
+ Die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} und \texttt{issn} werden
+ ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+ Der \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob die Stelle eines
+ Werks dieselbe ist wie die des zuletzt von diesem Autor zitierten Werks,
+ wird ausgeschaltet.
+ \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+ Der \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob das Werk dasselbe
+ ist wie das letzte von diesem Autor zitierte Werk, wird ausgeschaltet.
+ \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+ Der \emph{page tracker} wird eingeschaltet; bei einseitigen Dokumenten
+ prüft er auf einzelne Seiten, bei zweiseitigen Dokumenten auf
+ Doppelseiten. Die internen Tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} und \cmd{ifsamepage}
+ machen Gebrauch von dieser Einstellung.
+% \optset[footnote-dw]{uniquename}{false}
+% Es werden immer Vor- und Nachnamen ausgegeben.
+
+\subsection{Die Option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Anstatt viele Worte zu verlieren, um zu beschreiben, wie die Option
+funktioniert, werden im Folgenden einfach entsprechende Beispiele
+gezeigt. Dabei erscheint zunächst immer der \BibTeX"=Eintrag und darunter die
+entsprechende Ausgabe mit \option{journalnumber=date}. Die Beispiele wurden
+von Bernhard Tempel zusammengestellt.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Befehle und Begriffe}
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Befehle}
+Im Folgenden werden die von \bldw{} zur Verfügung gestellten Befehle mit ihrer Standarddefinition aufgelistet. Diese Befehle können mit \cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden.
+
+% \befehl{}{}{}
+ \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Schrift des Feldes
+ \texttt{annotation}.}
+ \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+ zwischen dem vorletzten und letzten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der
+ Bibliographie. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Zeichen vor dem Autor bei Benutzung von
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+ zwischen Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie. Vergleiche
+ \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen dem
+ ersten und zweiten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie beim
+ Schema \enquote{Nachname, Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit
+ nicht gemeint! Vergleiche \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Zeichen nach dem Autor bei Benutzung von
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen dem vorletzten
+ und letzten Namen in Zitaten. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen Namen in Zitaten.
+ Vergleiche \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{citenamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen nach Namen in
+ Zitaten.}
+ \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen
+ dem ersten und zweiten Namen in Zitaten beim Schema \enquote{Nachname,
+ Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit nicht gemeint! Vergleiche
+ \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{herenamepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+ \enquote{herename} (vor Seitenangaben in Vollzitaten von unselbständigen
+ Werken).}
+ \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+ \cmd{addnbspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor der Heftnummer
+ (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+ \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Zeichen zwischen Band und Heftnummer
+ einer Zeitschrift (bei \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+ \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor dem
+ Jahrgangsband (\texttt{volume}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+ \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Schrift des Feldes
+ \texttt{library}.}
+ \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+ und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=true} oder
+ wenn kein Verlag angegeben wurde.}
+ \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+ und Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+ \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+ Nachdruck bei \option{origfields=true} und
+ \option{origfieldsformat=punct}.}
+ \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Verlag (\texttt{publisher})
+ und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+ \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Zeichen vor dem Reihentitel (\texttt{series}),
+ innerhalb der Klammer.}
+ \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff zwischen dem
+ Reihentitel (\texttt{series}) und der Nummer (\texttt{number}).}
+ \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle, wenn
+ \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+ \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Länge zwischen Sigle und
+ Siglenbeschreibung, wenn \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+ \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+ Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon},
+ \texttt{maintitleaddon}).}
+
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Begriffe
+aufgeführt. Es gibt sie jeweils in einer langen und einer abgekürzten Form.
+Welche Form verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+ \biblstring{herename}{hier}{hier}
+ \biblstring{idemdat}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsf}{derselben}{ders\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsm}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsn}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpf}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpm}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpn}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpp}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{inrefstring}{Artikel\cmd{addspace}}{Art\cmd{adddotspace}}
+
+\end{labeling}
+Die \emph{bibliography strings} lassen sich folgendermaßen umdefinieren, wobei
+nicht zwischen einer langen und einer kurzen Form unterschieden werden kann:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+ idemdat = {idem},
+ idemdatsf = {eadem}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Geänderte Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die Begriffe aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung
+gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Ob die lange oder die abgekürzte
+Variante verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+% \biblstring{}{}{}
+ \biblstring{seenote}{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprint}{Nachdruck}{Ndr\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprintof}{Nachdruck von}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace} v\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprintas}{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddotspace} u\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace}\\%
+ d\cmd{adddot}\textbackslash{} Titel}
+ \biblstring{byauthor}{von}{v\cmd{adddot}}
+\end{labeling}
+Auch die übrigen zusammengesetzten Abkürzungen (wie oben \enquote{Ndr. v.})
+verwenden den Befehl \cmd{addabthinspace}, also einen kurzen Abstand zwischen
+den einzelnen Teilen der Abkürzung. Die genaue Bedeutung dieses Befehls wird
+in der \bl"=Dokumentation erklärt.
+
+\section{Weitere Hinweise}
+\label{weitere-anpassungen}
+Die folgenden Hinweise verstehen sich als Anregung für fortgeschrittene Anwender
+und beschreiben weitere Anpassungen, die von den Optionen des Pakets \bldw{}
+nicht abgedeckt werden.
+
+\subsection{Trennzeichen zwischen Namen}
+Anders als \bl{} unterscheidet \bldw{} zwischen den Trennzeichen, die in
+Zitaten verwendet werden, und denen in der Bibliographie. Bei \bl{} gibt es
+lediglich \cmd{multinamedelim} (zwischen mehreren Autoren),
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} (vor dem letzten Autor) und \cmd{revsdnamedelim}
+(zusätzliches Zeichen bei \enquote{Nachname, Vorname\textbar\ und Vorname2
+Nachname2}: dort wo \textbar\ steht, würde \cmd{revsdnamedelim} eingefügt
+werden).
+
+\bldw{} hingegen hat \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bibfinalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} für die Bibliographie sowie \cmd{citemultinamedelim},
+\cmd{citefinalnamedelim} und \cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} für die Literaturverweise
+im Text. Außerdem werden \cmd{multinamedelim}, \cmd{finalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{revsdnamedelim} im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} verwendet.
+Damit lassen sich unterschiedliche Darstellungsweisen festlegen. Die
+Standarddefinitionen sehen folgendermaßen aus:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Damit wird bei mehreren Autoren im Text ein Schrägstrich (/) ausgegeben, im
+Literaturverzeichnis und im Sigelverzeichnis dagegen Kommata bzw. (vor dem
+letzten Namen) ein \enquote{und}. Die Definitionen für das Literatur- und das
+Sigelverzeichnis stimmen also mit den Standarddefinitionen von \bl{} überein.
+Mit \cmd{renewcommand*} lassen sich diese Befehle nach eigenen Bedürfnissen
+anpassen.
+
+\subsection{Darstellung von Siglen (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+In \bl{} werden Akronyme (also Abkürzungen) wie z.\,B. \enquote{\textsc{URL}} in
+Kapitälchen gesetzt. Dazu wird der Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} benutzt, der standardmäßig
+folgendermaßen definiert ist:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+ {#1}
+ {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Das bedeutet: Falls Kapitälchen in der verwendeten Schrift vorhanden sind, werden
+Akronyme in Kapitälchen gesetzt, ansonsten normal.
+
+Vom typografischen Standpunkt aus (zumindest von meinem) ist es aber besser, für
+Akronyme Großbuchstaben zu verwenden, die leicht gesperrt werden und etwas kleiner
+sind als gewöhnliche Großbuchstaben. Die Sperrung lässt sich (bei Verwendung von
+\paket{pdftex} bzw. \paket{pdf"|latex}) mit dem Paket \paket{microtype} einstellen. Die
+Verkleinerung lässt sich mit dem Paket \paket{scalefnt} erreichen. Somit könnte man
+den Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} folgendermaßen anpassen:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Werte für \cmd{textls} und \cmd{scalefont} lassen sich natürlich den eigenen
+Vorstellungen oder Anforderungen anpassen.
+
+Wenn eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) ein Akronym ist (z.\,B. \enquote{LMA} für
+das \emph{Lexikon des Mittelalters}), kann man dem Eintrag
+\texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym= true\}} hinzufügen und die globale Option
+\option{acronyms=true} nutzen. Dann wird die Sigle mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro}
+gesetzt. Dasselbe gilt für Abkürzungen von Zeitschriften (z.\,B. \enquote{HZ} für
+die \emph{Historische Zeitschrift}); hier benutzt man die Felder
+\texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{HZ\}} und \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d26e139370
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc9dc455fe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+ %acronyms=true,
+ annotation=true,
+ %citedas=false,
+ %edbyidem=false,
+ %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+ %edstringincitations=false,
+ %edsuper=true,
+ %firstfull=true,
+ %firstfullname=true,
+ %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %herename=false,
+ %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %idembib=false,
+ %idembibformat=dash,
+ %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+ %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %nolocation=true,
+ %nopublisher=false,
+ %oldauthor=false,
+ %omiteditor=true,
+ %omitpages=true,
+ %origfields=false,
+ %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+ %pagetotal=true,
+ %pseudoauthor=false,
+ %series=afteryear,
+ %shorthandibid=false,
+ %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+ %shortjournal=true,
+ %terselos=false,
+ %xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+ %autocite=plain,
+ %citetracker=false,
+ %doi=true,
+ %eprint=true,
+ %ibidtracker=false,
+ %idemtracker=false,
+ %isbn=true,
+ %pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+%\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+%\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{authortitle-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14f4913c863
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,790 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+
+@STRING{cup = {Cambridge University Press}}
+
+@STRING{dtv = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag}}
+
+@ARTICLE{angenendt,
+ author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+ title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+ shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ volume = {97},
+ date = {2002},
+ pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+ annotation = {Ein deutschsprachiger Aufsatz in einer französischen Zeitschrift.
+ Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+ die Felder \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+ shortjournal = {RHE},
+ library = {Im Feld \texttt{library} ist Platz für Bibliotheksinformationen.},
+ options = {acronym=true}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:rhetoric,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith
+ Cope},
+ shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1877},
+ editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor} und \texttt{commentator} sowie \texttt{volumes},
+ \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+ volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:anima,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {De Anima},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1907},
+ editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{editor}).},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:poetics,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {Poetics},
+ shorttitle = {Poetics},
+ publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+ date = {1968},
+ editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+ series = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{editor}) sowie einem \texttt{series}-Feld.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:physics,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {Physics},
+ shorttitle = {Physics},
+ publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+ date = {1929},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit einem \texttt{translator}-Feld.},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {New York},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/bland,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect
+ by Ibn Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+ shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+ publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+ date = {1982},
+ editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+ number = {7},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und Reihennummer
+ (\texttt{number}).},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {New York},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Bland, Kalman P.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hannes,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit
+ der Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+ shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+ date = {1892},
+ editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator} und \texttt{commentator}; ebenso
+ die Felder \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+ und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Halle an der Saale},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ translator = {Hannes, Ludwig}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hercz,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects
+ mit dem Menschen},
+ shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+ subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von
+ Samuel Ibn Tibbon},
+ publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+ date = {1869},
+ editor = {Hercz, J.},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor} und \texttt{translator} sowie die Felder \texttt{indextitle}
+ und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+ indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Hercz, J.}
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{brandt,
+ author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+ title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis
+ 1448},
+ shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+ pages = {884--917},
+ editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+ booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+ publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+ date = {1987},
+ series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+ number = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{incollection}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und
+ Nummer (\texttt{number}). Man beachte das Format des Namens und vergleiche
+ die \texttt{useprefix}-Option im Feld \texttt{options}. Man beachte
+ außerdem die Felder \texttt{indextitle} und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448,
+ Die},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ options = {useprefix=false}
+}
+
+@BOOK{cicero,
+ author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+ title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+ shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+ publisher = {Reclam},
+ date = {1995},
+ editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+ annotation = {Eine zweisprachige Edition von Ciceros \emph{De natura deorum} mit
+ deutscher Übersetzung. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{language}-Felds
+ in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, die Verknüpfung der Felder \texttt{editor}
+ und \texttt{translator} sowie das Feld \texttt{afterword}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+ language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+ author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+ title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+ miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+ shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+ journal = {Scriptorium},
+ volume = {51},
+ date = {1997},
+ pages = {51-68},
+ gender = {sf},
+ number = {1},
+ hyphenation = {english},
+ annotation = {Ein englischsprachiger Aufsatz in einer Zeitschrift.
+ Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+ das Feld \texttt{number} und seine Ausgabe.},
+}
+
+@THESIS{geer,
+ author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+ title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+ date = {1985},
+ type = {phdthesis},
+ annotation = {Dies ist ein typischer \texttt{thesis}-Eintrag für eine Dissertationsschrift.
+ Man beachte das Feld \texttt{type} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, das
+ einen \emph{localization key} enthält.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+ location = {Uppsala},
+ subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study}
+}
+
+@BOOK{iliad,
+ author = {Homer},
+ title = {Die Ilias},
+ shorttitle = {Ilias},
+ publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+ date = {2004},
+ edition = {3},
+ annotation = {Eine deutsche Übersetzung der \emph{Ilias}. Man beachte die Felder
+ \texttt{translator} und \texttt{introduction}, das Format des \texttt{location}-Felds
+ in der \texttt{bib}-Datei sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und
+ \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+ introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+ location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+ sorttitle = {Ilias},
+ translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:kpv,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ pages = {1--163},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+ der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der praktischen Vernunft} bezieht,
+ nicht auf den gesamten fünften Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{author}
+ und \texttt{bookauthor} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. In den Standardeinstellungen
+ wird \texttt{bookauthor} ignoriert, falls die Werte der Felder \texttt{author}
+ und \texttt{bookauthor} identisch sind.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ shorthand = {KpV},
+ volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:ku,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ pages = {165--485},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+ der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der Urtheilskraft} bezieht, nicht
+ auf den gesamten fünften Band.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ shorthand = {KU},
+ volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+ author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+ title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+ xref = {LMA},
+ volume = {2},
+ date = {1983},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ pages = {1484},
+ pagination = {column},
+ bookpagination = {column},
+ booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ annotation = {Ein Lexikonartikel, also ein typischer \texttt{inreference}-Eintrag.
+ Zu beachten sind auch die Felder \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} und
+ \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+ title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ date = {1980/1999},
+ gender = {pp},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ volumes = {10},
+ shorthand = {LMA},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{reference}-Eintrag, gedacht für Nachschlagewerke. Intern
+ nichts anderes als ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte auch das Feld
+ \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{markey,
+ author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+ title = {Tame the BeaST},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag einer Anleitung. Man beachte das Format
+ des \texttt{date}-Feldes (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.},
+ date = {2005-10-16},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+ subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+ url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ version = {1.3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+ author = {Meisen, Karl},
+ title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+ shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+ subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+ date = {1981},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{origdate}
+ und \texttt{origlocation}, die dafür sorgen, dass \texttt{date} und \texttt{location}
+ als \enquote*{Nachdruck} erscheinen.},
+ gender = {sm},
+ series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+ number = {9--12},
+ location = {Düsseldorf},
+ origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+ origdate = {1931}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{nietzsche:historie,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+ shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+ subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ pages = {243--334},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ annotation = {Ein einzelner Beitrag aus der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken.
+ Dieser \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf einen Essay im
+ ersten Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}
+ und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}.
+ Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Eintrag erscheinen, der den gesamten
+ ersten Band wiedergibt.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+ indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-243},
+ volume = {1}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Die kritische Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser \texttt{book}-Eintrag
+ bezieht sich auf die gesamte, 15-bändige Edition. Man beachte das
+ \texttt{volumes}-Feld und das Format der Felder \texttt{publisher}
+ und \texttt{location} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. Man beachte außerdem
+ die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}, die die Sortierung
+ der Bibliographie beeinflussen.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+ sortyear = {1988-00-000},
+ volumes = {15}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa1,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein einzelner Band der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser
+ \texttt{book}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf den ersten Band. Man beachte
+ die Felder \texttt{title} und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder
+ \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}. Dieser Eintrag soll nach
+ dem Eintrag erscheinen, der die gesamte Edition anführt.},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I},
+ indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-000},
+ volume = {1}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{springer,
+ author = {Springer, Otto},
+ title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+ shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+ volume = {12},
+ date = {1950},
+ pages = {92--122},
+ annotation = {Ein einfacher \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder
+ \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+ shortjournal = {Med. Stud\adddot},
+}
+
+@BOOK{vazques-de-parga,
+ author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and
+ Ur{\'i}a R{\'i}u, Juan},
+ title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+ publisher = {Iberdrola},
+ date = {1993},
+ note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+ annotation = {Ein mehrbändiges Buch. Dies ist ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit den
+ Feldern \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {spanish},
+ indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+ location = {Pamplona},
+ sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+ editor = {Giese, Martina},
+ title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ location = {Hannover},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{shorthand}
+ und vergleiche im Sigelverzeichnis. Man beachte außerdem die Option \texttt{citedas}
+ im \texttt{options}-Feld.},
+ gender = {sf},
+ series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+ number = {72},
+ options = {citedas=false},
+ shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{jaffe,
+ editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+ title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum
+ natum \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+ shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ date = {1885/1888},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag mit den Feldern \texttt{edition} und
+ \texttt{volumes}. Man beachte außerdem die Felder \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype}
+ und \texttt{library}.},
+ library = {Bibliothek: Signatur},
+ location = {Leipzig},
+ editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+ editoratype = {redactor},
+ volumes = {2}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{britannica,
+ editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+ title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ date = {2003},
+ edition = {15},
+ annotation = {Dies ist ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag für ein Lexikon. Man beachte
+ die \texttt{useeditor}-Option im \texttt{options}-Feld sowie das \texttt{sorttitle}-Feld.
+ Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Titel einsortiert werden, obwohl es
+ einen Herausgeber gibt. Außerdem soll der Titel unter \enquote*{E}
+ einsortiert werden, nicht unter \enquote*{T}. Man beachte außerdem
+ das \texttt{label}-Feld, das für Autor-Jahr-Stile angegeben wurde.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+ label = {EB},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ options = {useeditor=false},
+ sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ volumes = {32}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{ctan,
+ title = {CTAN},
+ date = {2006},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag. Der \textsc{url}, der im Feld \texttt{url}
+ steht, wird automatisch in einen Link verwandelt, sofern die \texttt{hyperref}-Unterstützung
+ geladen wurde. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{urldate}-Felds
+ (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.
+ Man beachte außerdem das \texttt{label}-Feld, das als \emph{fallback}
+ (Sicherung) von Zitierstilen genutzt werden kann, die die Felder
+ \texttt{author} und\slash oder \texttt{year} bzw. \texttt{date} benötigen.},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ label = {CTAN},
+ subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+ der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+ Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+ Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+ Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+ author = {{Wulfstan von York}},
+ title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+ location = {London},
+ publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+ date = {1998},
+ editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+ options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+ origlocation = {Oxford},
+ origdate = {1957},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Predigten eines mittelalterlichen Autors. Man beachte das Feld
+ \texttt{options} sowie die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} und \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3247a8e6fa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..37a6e6ff79c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=footnote-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+ %acronyms=true,
+ annotation=true,
+ %citedas=false,
+ %edbyidem=false,
+ %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+ %edstringincitations=false,
+ %edsuper=true,
+ %firstfullname=true,
+ %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %herename=false,
+ %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %idembib=false,
+ %idembibformat=dash,
+ %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+ %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %nolocation=true,
+ %nopublisher=false,
+ %oldauthor=false,
+ %omiteditor=true,
+ %omitpages=true,
+ %origfields=false,
+ %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+ %pageref=true,
+ %pagetotal=true,
+ %pseudoauthor=false,
+ %series=afteryear,
+ %shorthandibid=false,
+ %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+ %shortjournal=true,
+ %terselos=false,
+ %xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+ %autocite=plain,
+ %citetracker=false,
+ %doi=true,
+ %eprint=true,
+ %ibidtracker=false,
+ %idemtracker=false,
+ %isbn=true,
+ %pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{footnote-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9bfc76e762f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe78deb9383
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+%%% biblatex-dw options %%%
+ %acronyms=true,
+ annotation=true,
+ %citedas=false,
+ %edbyidem=false,
+ %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+ %edstringincitations=false,
+ %edsuper=true,
+ %firstfull=true,
+ %firstfullname=true,
+ %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %herename=false,
+ %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %idembib=false,
+ %idembibformat=dash,
+ %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+ %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %nolocation=true,
+ %nopublisher=false,
+ %oldauthor=false,
+ %omiteditor=true,
+ %omitpages=true,
+ %origfields=false,
+ %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+ %pagetotal=true,
+ %pseudoauthor=false,
+ %series=afteryear,
+ %shorthandibid=false,
+ %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+ %shortjournal=true,
+ %terselos=false,
+ %xref=true,
+%% biblatex options %%%
+ %autocite=plain,
+ %citetracker=false,
+ %doi=true,
+ %eprint=true,
+ %ibidtracker=false,
+ %idemtracker=false,
+ %isbn=true,
+ %pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[See][]{springer}
+
+\cite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0d4f17b9f1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0d45af6b97f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=footnote-dw,
+%%% biblatex-dw options %%%
+ %acronyms=true,
+ annotation=true,
+ %citedas=false,
+ %edbyidem=false,
+ %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+ %edstringincitations=false,
+ %edsuper=true,
+ %firstfullname=true,
+ %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %herename=false,
+ %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %idembib=false,
+ %idembibformat=dash,
+ %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+ %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+ %nolocation=true,
+ %nopublisher=false,
+ %oldauthor=false,
+ %omiteditor=true,
+ %omitpages=true,
+ %origfields=false,
+ %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+ %pageref=true,
+ %pagetotal=true,
+ %pseudoauthor=false,
+ %series=afteryear,
+ %shorthandibid=false,
+ %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+ %shortjournal=true,
+ %terselos=false,
+ %xref=true,
+%% biblatex options %%%
+ %autocite=plain,
+ %citetracker=false,
+ %doi=true,
+ %eprint=true,
+ %ibidtracker=false,
+ %idemtracker=false,
+ %isbn=true,
+ %pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{footnote-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34b161729ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,781 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+@STRING{cup = "Cambridge University Press" }
+@STRING{dtv = "Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag" }
+
+@Article{angenendt,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+ indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+ shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+ volume = {97},
+ date = {2002},
+ pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+ annotation = {A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a typical
+ \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{library}, \texttt{shortjournal}
+ and \texttt{options} fields},
+ shortjournal = {RHE},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ library = {Here is room for some notes regarding the library in which the work is available}
+}
+
+@Article{springer,
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Springer, Otto},
+ title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+ shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+ journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+ volume = {12},
+ date = {1950},
+ pages = {92--122},
+ annotation = {A plain \texttt{article} entry. Note the field \texttt{shortjournal}.},
+ shortjournal = {Med.\ Stud\adddot}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:anima,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+ title = {De Anima},
+ publisher = cup,
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ date = {1907},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor}}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:physics,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.},
+ title = {Physics},
+ shorttitle = {Physics},
+ publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+ location = {New York},
+ date = {1929},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:poetics,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+ title = {Poetics},
+ shorttitle = {Poetics},
+ series = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+ publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor} as well as
+ a \texttt{series} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:rhetoric,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+ indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+ title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith Cope},
+ shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+ volumes = {3},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1877},
+ annotation = {A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+ \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+ and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/bland,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ translator = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+ title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect by Ibn
+ Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+ shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+ series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+ number = {7},
+ publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+ location = {New York},
+ date = {1982},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the
+ concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as
+ the \texttt{indextitle} field}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hannes,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ translator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der
+ Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+ shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+ location = {Halle an der Saale},
+ date = {1892},
+ annotation = {An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor},
+ \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator} fields. Also note the
+ \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hercz,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hercz, J.},
+ translator = {Hercz, J.},
+ indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+ indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+ title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects mit dem
+ Menschen},
+ subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von Samuel Ibn
+ Tibbon},
+ shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+ publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1869},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+ \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{cicero,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+ editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+ indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+ title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+ shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+ language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+ publisher = {Reclam},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ date = {1995},
+ annotation = {A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with a German
+ translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language} field in the database
+ file, the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields,
+ and the \texttt{afterword} field}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+ author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+ title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+ miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+ shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+ journal = {Scriptorium},
+ volume = {51},
+ date = {1997},
+ pages = {51-68},
+ gender = {sf},
+ number = {1},
+ hyphenation = {english},
+ annotation = {A typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the field
+ \texttt{number}.},
+}
+
+@Book{iliad,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Homer},
+ translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang},
+ introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+ sorttitle = {Ilias},
+ indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+ title = {Die Ilias},
+ shorttitle = {Ilias},
+ edition = {3},
+ publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+ location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the \texttt{translator} and
+ \texttt{introduction} fields and the format of the \texttt{location} field in
+ the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-00-000},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke},
+ title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volumes = {15},
+ edition = {2},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ annotation = {The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a \texttt{book} entry
+ referring to a 15-volume work as a whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and
+ the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the
+ database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields
+ which are used to fine-tune the sorting order of the bibliography. We want this
+ item listed first in the bibliography}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa1,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-000},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I},
+ indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = {1},
+ edition = {2},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ annotation = {A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+ \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first volume only. Note the
+ \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle}
+ and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry
+ referring to the entire edition}
+}
+
+@Book{vazques-de-parga,
+ hyphenation = {spanish},
+ author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and Ur{\'i}a
+ R{\'i}u, Juan},
+ sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+ title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+ volumes = {3},
+ publisher = {Iberdrola},
+ location = {Pamplona},
+ date = {1993},
+ note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+ annotation = {A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry with
+ \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Collection{britannica,
+ options = {useeditor=false},
+ label = {EB},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+ sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+ title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ volumes = {32},
+ edition = {15},
+ publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ date = {2003},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note the
+ \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be cited and alphabetized by
+ title even though there is an editor. In addition to that, we want the title to
+ be alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also note the
+ \texttt{label} field which is provided for author-year citation styles}
+}
+
+@Collection{jaffe,
+ editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+ editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+ editoratype = {redactor},
+ title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum natum
+ \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+ shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ volumes = {2},
+ edition = {2},
+ location = {Leipzig},
+ date = {1885/1888},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry with \texttt{edition} and \texttt{volumes} fields.
+ Note the \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype} and \texttt{library} fields},
+ library = {Library: Shelfmark}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:kpv,
+ shorthand = {KpV},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = {5},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1968},
+ pages = {1--163},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+ \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Practical
+ Reason} only, not to the entire fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and
+ \texttt{bookauthor} fields in the database file. By default, the
+ \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the \texttt{author} and
+ \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:ku,
+ shorthand = {KU},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = {5},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1968},
+ pages = {165--485},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+ \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Judgment}
+ only, not to the entire fifth volume}
+}
+
+@InBook{nietzsche:historie,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-243},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+ indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+ indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+ subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+ booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = {1},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ pages = {243--334},
+ annotation = {A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+ \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found in the first volume.
+ Note the \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also
+ note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to
+ be listed after the entry referring to the entire first volume}
+}
+
+@InCollection{brandt,
+ options = {useprefix=false},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+ editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+ indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, Die},
+ title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+ booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+ series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+ number = {2},
+ publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ date = {1987},
+ pages = {884--917},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}.
+ Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in
+ the \texttt{options} field. Also
+ note the \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}}
+}
+
+@Online{ctan,
+ label = {CTAN},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ title = {CTAN},
+ subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+ date = {2006},
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ annotation = {This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is given in the
+ \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref}
+ support has been enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field
+ (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.
+ Also note the \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by citation
+ styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a \texttt{year}}
+}
+
+@Online{markey,
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+ sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+ title = {Tame the BeaST},
+ subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+ version = {1.3},
+ date = {2005-10-16},
+ url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of the \texttt{date}
+ field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.}
+}
+
+@Thesis{geer,
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+ title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+ subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study},
+ institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+ type = {phdthesis},
+ location = {Uppsala},
+ date = {1985},
+ annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note the
+ \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key.}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+ editor = {Giese, Martina},
+ title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ location = {Hannover},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry. Note the \texttt{shorthand} field and compare
+ the List of Shorthands. Not also the \texttt{citedas} option in the \texttt{options}
+ field},
+ gender = {sf},
+ series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+ number = {72},
+ file = {dMGH:http\://www.dmgh.de/dmghband.html?bsbbandname=00000719&frameaction=bandansicht:URL},
+ keywords = {Quelle, Deutsches Reich, 10. Jahrhundert, 11. Jahrhundert},
+ shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ options = {citedas=false}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+ author = {Meisen, Karl},
+ title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+ shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+ subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+ origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+ origdate = {1931},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{origdate} and \texttt{origlocation}
+ fields and the \enquote*{reprint} output},
+ gender = {sm},
+ series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+ number = {9--12},
+ location = {Düsseldorf},
+ date = {1981}
+}
+
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+ der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+ Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+ Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+ Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+ author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+ title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+ xref = {LMA},
+ volume = {2},
+ date = {1983},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ pages = {1484},
+ pagination = {column},
+ bookpagination = {column},
+ booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ annotation = {An article in a work of reference (e.g. in an
+ encyclopedia or in a dictionary), thus a typical \texttt{inreference} entry.
+ Note also the fields \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} and
+ \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+ title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ date = {1980/1999},
+ gender = {pp},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ volumes = {10},
+ shorthand = {LMA},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{reference} entry. This entry type is meant for works of reference, e.g.
+ encyclopedias or dictionaries. Internally, it is just an alias for a \texttt{collection} entry.
+ Note also the field \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+ author = {{Wulfstan of York}},
+ title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+ location = {London},
+ publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+ date = {1998},
+ editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+ options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+ origlocation = {Oxford},
+ origdate = {1957},
+ annotation = {An edition of homilies by one medieval author. Note the \texttt{options} field
+ as well as the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} and \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63235482766
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,832 @@
+% authortitle-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2010/02/14}
+ {}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex}
+ {Outdated 'biblatex' package}
+ {The version of the 'authortitle-dw' style you are using\MessageBreak
+ requires biblatex v0.9 or later.\MessageBreak
+ You are using: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+ This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now.}%
+ \endinput}
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:annotation}
+\newbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+\newbool{bbx:edsuper}
+\newbool{bbx:idembib}
+\newbool{bbx:library}
+\newbool{bbx:nolocation}
+\newbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+\newbool{bbx:oldauthor}
+\newbool{bbx:origfields}
+\newbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+\newbool{oldauthor}
+\newbool{pseudoauthor}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{oldauthor}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{pseudoauthor}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{annotation}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:annotation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edbyidem}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edbyidem}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edsuper}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edsuper}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembib}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:idembib}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{library}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:library}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nolocation}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nolocation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nopublisher}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nopublisher}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:oldauthor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfields}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:origfields}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pseudoauthor}}
+
+\newcommand{\bbx@idembibformat}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@editorstring}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@namefont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@idemfont}{empty}% wichtig zur Überprüfung wegen Paket-Warnung bei falscher Option
+\newcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstring}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@editorstring}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstnamefont}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidemfont}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembibformat}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@idembibformat}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idemfont}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@idemfont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{namefont}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@namefont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfieldsformat}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{#1}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{%
+ edbyidem=true,
+ editorstring=parens,
+ firstnamefont=normal,
+ ibidemfont=normal,
+ idembib=true,
+ idembibformat=idem,
+ namefont=normal,
+ nolocation=false,
+ nopublisher=true,
+ oldauthor=true,
+ origfields=true,
+ origfieldsformat=punct,
+ pseudoauthor=true
+}
+
+%% Autoren, Herausgeber und Übersetzter in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareNameAlias{author}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{editor}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{translator}{sortname}
+
+%% Komma statt Punkt nach einzelnen Elementen der Literaturangaben
+\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Titel und Untertitel
+\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\newcommand*{\titleaddonpunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+\renewcommand*{\labelnamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\locationdatepunct}{\addspace}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Verlag
+\newcommand*{\locationpublisherpunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Verlag und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\publisherdatepunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen vor 'Nachdruck' bei Benutzung von 'origfields'
+\newcommand*{\origfieldspunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen für pseudoauthor=true
+\newcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{}
+\newcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{}
+
+%% Zeichen zw. Autoren/Editoren in der Bibliographie
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \let\revsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim%
+ \let\multinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim%
+ \let\finalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim%
+%
+%% 'Ders.' statt '--' in der Bibliographie
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@idembibformat}{idem}
+ {\renewcommand*{\bibnamedash}{\bibsentence\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}}%
+ {}%
+}
+
+%% Formate in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[incollection]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{title}{%
+ \bibstring{inrefstring}%
+ \enquote{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inproceedings]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[thesis]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{volume}{#1}% volume of an inreference entry
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\textsc{url}\addcolon\space\url{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition:super}{% für Option 'edsuper'
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ The 'edition' field of entry\MessageBreak
+ '\abx@field@entrykey' is not an integer.\MessageBreak
+ The edition will not be printed as\MessageBreak
+ superscript. Instead, the 'edition'\MessageBreak
+ field is printed completely}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthand}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shortjournal}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+
+\newcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+\newcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
+ \annotationfont #1\addperiod}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{library}{%
+ \libraryfont #1\addperiod}
+
+\newbibmacro*{finentry:annotation}{%
+ \iffieldundef{annotation}
+ {\finentry}%
+ {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+ \printfield{annotation}}%
+}
+
+\newbibmacro*{finentry:library}{%
+ \iffieldundef{library}
+ {\finentry}%
+ {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+ \printfield{library}}%
+}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{finentry}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:annotation}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:library}% BEIDE true
+ {\iffieldundef{annotation}
+ {}% kein \finentry!
+ {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+ \printfield{annotation}}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry:library}}
+ {\usebibmacro{finentry:annotation}}}% nur annotation=true
+ {\ifbool{bbx:library}% nur library=true
+ {\usebibmacro{finentry:library}}
+ {\finentry}}}% BEIDE false
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für die List of Shorthands
+\AtEveryLositem{%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Wichtig für die Herausgebernamen in der List of Shorthands
+\InitializeBibliographyStyle{%
+ \let\bbx@lasthash\undefined}
+
+% Formatierung der Nachnamen entsprechend der Option 'namefont'
+% Nachnamen von Einträgen mit 'options = {oldauthor=true}' oder 'options = {oldauthor}'
+% werden nicht in der Schrift von 'namefont' gesetzt
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamelast}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+ \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+ \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+ \OR
+ \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+ \)}
+ {#1}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}
+
+% Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'firstnamefont'
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamefirst}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+ \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+ \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+ \OR
+ \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+ \)}
+ {#1}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}
+
+% Wenn 'firstnamefont' gesetzt ist, muss auch prefix angepasst werden
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameprefix}[1]{%
+ \ifuseprefix{% bei useprefix=true
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+ \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+ \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+ \OR
+ \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+ \)}
+ {#1}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}
+ {% bei useprefix=false richtet es sich nach der Option firstname
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}
+
+% Wenn 'firstnamefont' gesetzt ist, muss auch suffix angepasst werden
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameaffix}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+ \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+ \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+ \OR
+ \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+ \)}
+ {#1}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}
+
+%% \mkidem:
+% wenn im Feld 'options' 'oldauthor=true' oder 'oldauthor' steht,
+% werden keine Kapitälchen o.ä. bei Wiederholungszitaten ('Ders.') gesetzt
+% ansonsten Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'idemfont',
+% falls diese nicht vorhanden ist, wird der Wert von 'namefont' übernommen
+\newcommand*{\mkidem}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifbool{oldauthor}
+ {#1}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}%
+ {#1}
+ {% falls idemfont nicht gesetzt ist, wird von namefont 'geerbt':
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}}}}%
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}%
+ {#1}
+ {% falls idemfont nicht gesetzt ist, wird von namefont 'geerbt':
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}}}}}}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
+ \iffieldundef{title}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[title]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{titleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
+ \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[booktitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{booktitleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[maintitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{maintitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{mainsubtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{maintitleaddon}}}
+
+%% Ort, Verlag, Jahr:
+%% - mit 'origfields=true' werden origlocation, origpublisher
+%% und origyear gesetzt, der Rest als 'reprint' angehängt
+%% - der Verlag ist optional (nopublisher=true|false)
+%% - die Edition kann hochgestellt werden (edsuper=true|false)
+\newbibmacro*{origdate}{\printorigdate}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:origfields}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+ {\iflistundef{origlocation}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\blxdw@warning{%
+ Field 'origlocation' is set, but 'origdate' is
+ \MessageBreak%
+ empty at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+ The 'orig' fields \MessageBreak are omitted
+ for this entry}%
+ \usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}}
+
+\newbibmacro{loc+pub+year}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{publisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{publisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{origlocation}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{origpublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{origpublisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{origdate}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[brackets]{%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+ {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}}
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}{%
+ \bibstring{reprint}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{publisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{publisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}
+
+%% Test, ob ein Feld nur eine Zahl beinhaltet
+\newcommand{\bbx@iffieldinteger}[1]{%
+ \iffieldundef{#1}
+ {\@secondoftwo}
+ {\edef\@tempa{\strfield{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\ifinteger\expandafter{\@tempa}}}
+
+%% Edition nur ausgeben, wenn Option 'edsuper=false'
+\newbibmacro*{edition}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\bbx@iffieldinteger{edition}
+ {}% falls 'edition' eine Zahl ist, wird hochgestellt
+ {\printfield{edition}%
+ \newunit}}% ansonsten wird komplett ausgegeben
+ {\printfield{edition}%
+ \newunit}}
+
+%% Herausgeber ('Hrsg.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%
+ \iffieldundef{editortype}
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{editors}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{editors}}}%
+ {\bibstring{editors}}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{editor}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{editor}}}%
+ {\bibstring{editor}}}}}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}%
+ {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}%
+ {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}}}}%
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+othersstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\def\@tempa{editors}}
+ {\def\@tempa{editor}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator}
+ {\appto\@tempa{tr}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator}
+ {\appto\@tempa{co}%
+ \clearname{commentator}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator}
+ {\appto\@tempa{an}%
+ \clearname{annotator}}
+ {}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction}
+ {\appto\@tempa{in}%
+ \clearname{introduction}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword}
+ {\appto\@tempa{fo}%
+ \clearname{foreword}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword}
+ {\appto\@tempa{af}%
+ \clearname{afterword}}
+ {}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\@tempa}}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\@tempa}}}
+ {\bibstring{\@tempa}}}}
+
+%% Übersetzer ('Übers.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{translatorstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{translators}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{translators}}}%
+ {\bibstring{translators}}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{translator}}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{translator}}}%
+ {\bibstring{translator}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+othersstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{translators}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{translator}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+ \clearname{commentator}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+ \clearname{annotator}}
+ {}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+ \clearname{introduction}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+ \clearname{foreword}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+ \clearname{afterword}}
+ {}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+ {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+ {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}
+ {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}}
+
+%% Option 'editorstring=brackets|parens|normal'
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{editor}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{editor}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{translator}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{translator}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+others}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{translator}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{translator}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{translator+othersstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{author}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:pseudotrue}}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:pseudofalse}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudotrue}{%
+ \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+ {\printtext{\bibleftpseudo}}
+ {}%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{author}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}
+ {\printnames{author}}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \iffieldundef{authortype}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space
+ \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}%
+ \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+ {\printtext{\bibrightpseudo}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudofalse}{%
+ \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{author}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}
+ {\printnames{author}}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \iffieldundef{authortype}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space
+ \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}}}
+
+%% 'Ders.' bei inbook, wenn gleicher Autor
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+ \ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}\addcolon}
+ {\printnames{bookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock}}
+ {\printnames{bookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock}}
+
+%% Wenn Autor und Hrsg. gleich --> hg. v. dems./ders./dens.:
+\renewbibmacro*{byeditor+others}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}\AND
+ \(\iffieldundef{editortype}\OR
+ \iffieldequalstr{editortype}{editor}\)}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{byeditor}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{tr}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+ \clearname{commentator}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+ \clearname{annotator}}
+ {}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+ \clearname{introduction}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+ \clearname{foreword}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+ \clearname{afterword}}
+ {}}}%
+ \bibstring{\abx@tempa}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+ \clearname{editor}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditorx}}%
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\bibstring{byeditor}\addspace\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Makros aus authortitle.bbx (unverändert) %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\renewcommand*{\thebibitem}{\item}
+\renewcommand*{\thelositem}{\item}
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{0pt}
+
+\renewenvironment*{thebibliography}
+ {\list
+ {}
+ {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+ {\endlist}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4cffc2510fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+% footnote-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2010/02/14}
+ {}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex}
+ {Outdated 'biblatex' package}
+ {The version of the 'footnote-dw' style you are using\MessageBreak
+ requires biblatex v0.9 or later.\MessageBreak
+ You are using: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+ This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now.}%
+ \endinput}
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{authortitle-dw}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8bdd7cf0d44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,1710 @@
+% standard-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard}
+
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{english}{english-dw}
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{german}{german-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:acronym}
+\newbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:journumdate}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+\newbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+\newbool{bbx:terselos}
+\newbool{bbx:xref}% soll xref überhaupt verwendet werden?
+\newbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}
+
+% Schalter zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\newbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+
+\newlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}
+\newlength{\shorthandsep}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{acronym}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:acronym}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{acronyms}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandacro}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandwidth}{%
+ \setlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}{#1}
+ \setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \csuse{booltrue}{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shortjournal}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shortjournal}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{terselos}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:terselos}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{xref}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:xref}}
+
+% Optionen zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pagetotal}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pagetotal}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{journalnumber}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{#1}}
+% zu Ehren von Bernhard Tempel
+\newbool{bbx:bernhard}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{bernhard}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:bernhard}}
+
+% Option series=standard|afteryear
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@series}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{series}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@series}{#1}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@series}{afteryear}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:seriesafteryear}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ doi=false,
+ eprint=false,
+ isbn=false,
+ journalnumber=standard,
+ pagetotal=false,
+ series=standard,
+ terselos=true,
+ xref=false
+}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mincrossrefs=1}}
+ {}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{idemreference}{idemcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefreference}{xrefcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefidemreference}{xrefidemcollection}
+
+%% Zeichen bei Zeitschriften:
+%% -> vor 'volume' (z.B. 'Jg. ')
+\newcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace}
+%% -> zwischen 'volume' und 'number'
+%% (nur mit journumafteryear=true)
+\newcommand*{\jourvolnumsep}{\adddot}
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Nr. ')
+\newcommand*{\journumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space%
+ \bibstring{number}%
+ \addnbspace}
+
+%% Zeichen bei Reihen:
+%% -> vor 'series' (z.B. '= ')
+\newcommand*{\seriespunct}{}
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Bd. ')
+\newcommand*{\sernumstring}{\addspace}
+
+%% Reihe in Klammern
+\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
+ \iffieldundef{series}%
+ {}
+ {\printtext[parens]{%
+ \seriespunct%
+ \printfield{series}%
+ \setunit*{\sernumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit}}}
+
+%% Kürzere Ausgabe der List of Shorthands
+\newbibmacro*{terselos}{%
+\ifbool{bbx:terselos}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{author}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}
+ {\printnames{author}}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}}%
+ \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+ {\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}}
+ {\usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}}%
+ \finentry}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthands}{%
+ \usebibmacro{terselos}}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung nach dem Shorthand-Label
+\newcommand{\shorthandpunct}{}
+
+%% List of Shorthands: Länge der Labels einstellbar
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+ {\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+ \renewenvironment*{theshorthands}
+ {\list
+ {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}%
+ \printtext{\shorthandpunct}}
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\bbx@shorthandwidth}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\shorthandsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+ {\endlist}}
+ {\renewenvironment*{theshorthands}
+ {\list
+ {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}%
+ \printtext{\shorthandpunct}}
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+ {\endlist}}}
+
+%% bei useeditor=true
+\newbibmacro*{editorincoll}{%
+ \ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}%
+ {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \clearname{editor}}}
+
+%% Wenn 'volumes' und 'volume' angegeben sind,
+%% 'volumes' immer vor 'volume' ausgeben
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt,
+ % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+ % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+ {\printfield{volumes}}
+ {}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle+title}{%
+ \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title}
+ {\clearfield{maintitle}%
+ \clearfield{mainsubtitle}%
+ \clearfield{maintitleaddon}}
+ {\iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%% Test, ob 'volume' vorhanden ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolumecheck}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+ {\listcsxadd{novolume@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+ {}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Test, ob 'citedas=true' gesetzt ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefcitedascheck}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+ {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+ {\listcsxadd{citedas@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+ {}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Tests werden bei 'xref=true' in @book, @collection,
+%% @proceedings und @reference ausgeführt
+\AtDataInput[book]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[collection]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[proceedings]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[reference]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+
+%% 'volume' bei xref-child ausgeben, falls
+%% in xref-parent nicht definiert
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume}{%
+ \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {\newunit
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \iflistxref{location}% wenn 'location' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}}
+ {}}%
+
+% bei @inreference: booktitle, vol. (year)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume:inreference}{%
+ \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+ {\newunit
+ \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield[parens]{year}}}}
+ {}}
+
+%% 'volume' und 'year' ausgeben bei @inreference
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part+year}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}%
+ \iffieldundef{year}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield[parens]{year}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt,
+ % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+ % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+ {\printfield{volumes}}
+ {}}}
+
+%% Option 'shortjournal=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+ {\iffieldundef{shortjournal}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}
+ {\printfield{shortjournal}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{journal:normal}{% vollständige, 'normale' Ausgabe eines Zeitschriftentitels
+ \iffieldundef{journaltitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}
+
+%% Option 'journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date'
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:bernhard}% Bernhard geht vor (c;
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{journal}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{series}
+ {}
+ {\newunit
+ \printfield{series}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\jourvolstring}%
+ \printfield{volume}}%
+ % ab hier Unterscheidung nach standard|afteryear|date
+ \ifbool{bbx:journumdate}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+date}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+standard}}}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+standard}{%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning{%
+ Field 'number' set, but 'volume' is empty
+ \MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+ The output might not \MessageBreak be correct}}}
+ {\setunit{\jourvolnumsep}%
+ \printfield{number}}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date}}
+ {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\newunit%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=afteryear
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}{%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}}}%
+ {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\newunit%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=date
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+date}{%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date+number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\newunit%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% Klammern entfernt
+ \iffieldundef{issue}
+ {\printdate}
+ {\printfield{issue}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{year}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro*{issue+date+number}{%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {\iffieldundef{issue}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{issue}}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{issue}% mit definiertem Feld number
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}}
+ {\iffieldundef{day}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{month}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{year}}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{day}%
+ {\setunit{\addspace\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{month}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{year}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{issue}}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{issue}}}}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Bibmacros für Code, der im Bibliography %%%%%
+%%%%% Driver aufgerufen wird, wenn KEIN xref %%%%%
+%%%%% vorhanden ist. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}%
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:incollection}{%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}{%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}%
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inreference}{%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part+year}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Bibliography Driver %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{booklet}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{collection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifnamexref{labelname}%
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}%
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{incollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnamexref{labelname}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:xrefnoidem}}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}%
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inreference}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit*{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}%
+ {\ifentryseen{\thefield{xref}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde schon zitiert
+ {\booltrue{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde noch nicht zitiert
+ \printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume:inreference}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{location}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
+ {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \iflistundef{location}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{%
+ \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+ {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isrn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{thesis}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{unpublished}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+ {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xref'-BibliographyDriver sind %%%%%
+%%%%% nötig, damit bei Erstzitaten mit xref die %%%%%
+%%%%% Option useeditor=true beachtet wird. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xrefidem'-BibliographyDriver %%%%%
+%%%%% sind nötig damit bei Erstzitaten mit demselben %%%%%
+%%%%% Autor und xref ein Vollzitat erfolgen kann, %%%%%
+%%%%% ohne den Autor des referenzierten Werkes (der %%%%%
+%%%%% durch 'idem' ersetzt wird) auszugeben. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidembook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}%
+ \setunit{\citenamepunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Warnungen %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \blx@safe@actives
+ \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\blxdw@noline}%
+ \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@noline#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \blx@safe@actives
+ \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\@gobble}%
+ \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@entry#1{%
+ \ifundef\abx@field@entrykey
+ {\blxdw@warning{#1}}
+ {\blxdw@warning{#1\MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'}}}
+\let\blxdw@noline\@gobble
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'origfieldsformat'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'origfieldsformat=punct' used instead}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{normal}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'namefont'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'namefont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{normal}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'firstnamefont'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'firstnamefont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{smallcaps}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{italic}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{bold}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{normal}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'ibidemfont'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'ibidemfont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{empty}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'idemfont'.\MessageBreak
+ Value of option 'namefont' used instead}}}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{normal}
+ {}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{editorstring=parens}%
+ \blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'editorstring'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'editorstring=parens' used instead}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{standard}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'journalnumber'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'journalnumber=standard' used instead}}}}%
+ \iftoggle{blx@useeditor}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Option 'omiteditor' cannot be used\MessageBreak
+ together with option 'useeditor=true'.\MessageBreak
+ Thus, 'omiteditor' is ignored}}
+ {}}%
+ {}%
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3111bedb54c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,369 @@
+% authortitle-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:firstfull}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfull}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfull}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+ \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+ {\ifciteseen
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:firstfull}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:normal}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}
+ {}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:firstfull}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+ {}%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}%
+ \iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}%
+ {\iffieldundef{pages}
+ {}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+ \cbx@tempa
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\gdef\cbx@tempa{%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+ \addspace\bibleftparen}%
+ \BibliographyWarning{No author or editor given for \textcite}%
+ \textbf{\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+ {\printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+ {\printnames{labelname}}%
+ \gdef\cbx@tempa{%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+ \addspace\bibleftparen}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\ifsingletitle
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+ \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+ {\ifciteseen
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}
+ \citenamepunct}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+ \citenamepunct}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \citenamepunct}}}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}%
+ {\ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}}}}
+ {}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorttitle}%
+ {\printfield{title}}%
+ {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}}}%
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}%
+ \clearfield{editor}}
+ {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}%
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:parens}%
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{textcite}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\bibrightparen\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
+ {}%
+ \multicitedelim}
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\bibrightparen}
+ {}}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\postnotedelim}
+ {\addspace\bibleftparen}%
+ \printfield{postnote}\bibrightparen}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+ \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+ {\bibsentence
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+ \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{citetitle}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+ \cbx@tempa
+ \ifsingletitle
+ {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \citenamepunct, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+ {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title:force}{%
+ \cbx@tempa
+ \printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert übernommen aus authortitle-ibid.cbx %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\newbool{cbx:parens}
+\newbool{cbx:loccit}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{true}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=constrict}}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=false}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+ \cbx@tempa
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}%
+ \ifloccit
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:loccit}
+ {}%
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\cite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+ {\bibsentence
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4df49f87aba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+% footnote-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:pageref}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pageref}[true]{%
+ \setbool{cbx:pageref}{#1}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ uniquename=false, % damit bei idem=false Vor- und Nachname gesetzt werden!
+ loccittracker=true,% für die Option 'ibidpage'
+}
+
+% Kommandos zum Verpacken der Zitate in Fußnoten
+\newrobustcmd{\mkfootnotecite}[1]{%
+ \iffootnote
+ {#1}
+ {\unspace\footnote{%
+ \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+ \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+
+\newbool{cbx:parencitefoot}% wenn parencite innerhalb einer
+ % Fußnote aufgerufen wird
+ % (wichtig für seenote)
+\newrobustcmd{\mkparencite}[1]{%
+ \iffootnote
+ {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\mkbibparens\mkbibbrackets
+ \bibleftparen#1\bibrightparen
+ \endgroup}
+ {\unspace\footnote{%
+ \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+ \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \bibhypertarget{cite\the\value{instcount}}{%
+ \ifciteseen
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:name}%
+ \ifopcit
+ {\ifloccit
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:loccit}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:opcit}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{footref}{%
+ \csxdef{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+ \label{cbx@\the\value{instcount}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {\setunit{}}
+ {}}%
+ {\setunit{}}%
+ \printtext[bibhypertarget]{%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}%
+ \iffieldundef{pages}
+ {}%
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {}}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+ \ifsingletitle
+ {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \citenamepunct, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+ {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:seenote}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot}
+ {\addspace\mkbibbrackets{%
+ \bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%\ref{\thefield{entrykey}}%
+ \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+ {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+ {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace
+ \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+ {}}}
+ {\addspace\mkbibparens{%
+ \bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%\ref{\thefield{entrykey}}%
+ \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+ {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+ {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace
+ \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+ {}}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \ifciteseen
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+ \citenamepunct}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}}%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}%
+ \clearfield{editor}}
+ {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}%
+
+%% falls eine Bibliographie ausgegeben wird,
+%% soll kein '(wie Anm. x)' erscheinen
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}%
+ {\ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}}}}
+ {}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorttitle}%
+ {\printfield{title}}%
+ {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}}}%
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkparencite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\bibsentence
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+ \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\bibsentence
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {}%
+ \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+ \herenamepunct%
+ \bibstring{herename}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+ \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\cites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\cite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\parencites}[\mkparencite]{\parencite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\footcites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\footcite}{\multicitedelim}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert aus verbose-trad1 übernommen %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\newbool{cbx:loccit}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{true}
+ {\renewbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}}
+ {\renewbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:opcit}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{opcit}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:loccit}{%
+ \printtext{%
+ \bibhyperlink{cite\@nameuse{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}}{%
+ \bibstring[\mkibid]{loccit}}}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+ \printtext{%
+ \bibhyperlink{cite\@nameuse{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}}{%
+ \bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}}%
+ \ifloccit
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid:page}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:loccit}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2258c80549e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+% standard-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\newbool{cbx:authedxref}
+\newbool{cbx:citedas}
+\newbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+\newbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+\newbool{cbx:herename}
+\newbool{cbx:idemfull}
+\newbool{cbx:noidem}
+\newbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+\newbool{cbx:omitpages}
+\newbool{cbx:option:herename}
+\newbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+\newbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+\newbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+\newbool{cbx:shorthandibid}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citedas}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edstringincitations}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:edstringincitations}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfullname}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfullname}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{herename}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:option:herename}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{omiteditor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:omiteditor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{omitpages}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:option:omitpages}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{citedas}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ autocite=footnote,
+ citedas=true,
+ citetracker=true,
+ edstringincitations=true,
+ herename=true,
+ ibidtracker=constrict,
+ idemtracker=constrict,
+ loccittracker=false,
+ opcittracker=false,
+ pagetracker=true,
+ shorthandibid=true
+}
+
+\InitializeCitationStyle{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\OnManualCitation{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:reset}{%
+ \global\undef\cbx@lasthash%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:save}{%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
+ \csxdef{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:noidem}}
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für Zitate im Text
+\AtEveryCite{%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+\newcommand*{\citenamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Slashes zwischen Autoren/Editoren
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\AtEveryCite{%
+ \let\revsdnamedelim\citerevsdnamedelim
+ \let\multinamedelim\citemultinamedelim
+ \let\finalnamedelim\citefinalnamedelim
+}
+\AtBeginBibliography{% am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses umschalten wegen xref
+ \let\citerevsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim
+ \let\citemultinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim
+ \let\citefinalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim
+}
+
+%% Titelformate in Zitaten
+\DeclareFieldFormat{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[incollection]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inproceedings]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[thesis]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labelyear}{#1}% e.g., the 'a' in '1995a'
+
+%% herename
+\newcommand*{\herenamepunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:name}{%
+ \printnames{labelname}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}}
+ {}%
+ \setunit*{\citenamepunct}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:idem}{%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}}
+ {}%
+ \setunit{\citenamepunct}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+ \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {}%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+ \AND\ifnameundef{editor}%
+ \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+ {\addspace}%
+ {\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
+ \iffieldundef{postnote}
+ {}
+ {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:herename}\AND\NOT
+ \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+ {\addspace}
+ {\postnotedelim}%
+ \printfield{postnote}}}
+
+% Option 'nameseen'
+\newcommand*{\cbx@seennames}{}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@nameseen}[1]{%
+ \listxadd{\cbx@seennames}{\detokenize{#1}}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@ifnameseen}[1]{%
+ \xifinlist{\detokenize{#1}}{\cbx@seennames}}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+ {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{%
+ \cbx@ifnameseen{#1#3#5#7}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
+ \cbx@nameseen{#1#3#5#7}}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+ \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor}
+ {\boolfalse{citetracker}%
+ \boolfalse{pagetracker}%
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\indexnames{labelname}%
+ \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Formatierung von 'ibidem' entsprechend der Option 'ibidemfont'
+\providecommand*{\mkibid}[1]{%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{smallcaps}%
+ {\textsc{#1}}%
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{italic}%
+ {\textit{#1}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{bold}%
+ {\textbf{#1}}
+ {#1}}}}
+
+%% pages (berücksichtigt die Option 'omitpages')
+\newbibmacro*{pages}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:omitpages}
+ {}% keine Seitenzahl bei Vollzitat und omitpages=true
+ {\setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+ \printfield{pages}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
+ \printfield{chapter}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:omitpages}
+ {}% keine Seitenzahl bei Vollzitat und omitpages=true
+ {\setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+ \printfield{pages}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%% in manchen Literaturverweisen (wenn nicht fullcite)
+%% müssen statt der vollen Namen (Format [byeditor])
+%% nur die Nachnamen ausgegeben werden (Format [labelname])
+\newbibmacro*{cite:byeditor}{%
+ \ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[labelname]{editor}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editor}{%
+ \ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{editor}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+ {\addspace%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}
+ {\citenamepunct}
+ \clearname{editor}}}
+
+%% Test, ob author und editor bei xref identisch sind
+%% (für xref=true, useeditor=false, edbyidem=true)
+\newbibmacro*{authedxrefcheck}{%
+ \iffieldundef{xref}
+ {}
+ {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}%
+ \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{%
+ \savename{editor}{\bbx@tempa}}%
+ \ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}%
+ {\booltrue{cbx:authedxref}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:authedxref}}}}
+
+%% xref
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@xref}
+ {}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:xref}}%
+ {}%
+ {}%
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80f923cadd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+% english-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{english-dw.lbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex localization file]
+
+\NewBibliographyString{herename,idemdat,idemdatsf,idemdatsm,%
+ idemdatsn,idemdatpf,idemdatpm,idemdatpn,idemdatpp,inrefstring}
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{english}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+ inherit = {english},
+ herename = {{here}{here}},
+ idemdat = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsm = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsf = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsn = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatpm = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpf = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpn = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpp = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ inrefstring = {{article}{art\adddot}},
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0cbb88ab3a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+% german-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{german-dw.lbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex localization file]
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{german}
+
+\NewBibliographyString{herename,idemdat,idemdatsf,idemdatsm,%
+ idemdatsn,idemdatpf,idemdatpm,idemdatpn,idemdatpp,inrefstring}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+ inherit = {german},
+ herename = {{hier}{hier}},
+ idem = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemsm = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemsf = {{dieselbe}{dies\adddot}},
+ idemsn = {{dasselbe}{dass\adddot}},
+ idempm = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempf = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempn = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempp = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ ibidem = {{ebenda}{ebd\adddot}},
+ idemdat = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatsm = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatsf = {{derselben}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemdatsn = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatpm = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpf = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpn = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpp = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ inrefstring = {{Artikel\addspace}{Art\adddotspace}},
+ seenote = {{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\adddot}},
+ reprint = {{Nachdruck}{Ndr\adddot}},
+ reprintof = {{Nachdruck von}{Ndr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ reprintas = {{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{Ndr\adddotspace u\adddot\addabthinspace d\adddot\ Titel}},
+ byauthor = {{von}{v\adddot}},
+ byeditor = {{herausgegeben von}{hrsg\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycompiler = {{kompiliert von}{komp\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byredactor = {{bearbeitet von}{bearb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byfounder = {{begr\"undet von}{begr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycontinuator = {{fortgef\"urt von}{fortgef\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycollaborator = {{unter Mitarbeit von}{unter Mitarb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bytranslator = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt von}{\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycommentator = {{kommentiert von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byannotator = {{erl\"autert von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withcommentator = {{mit einem Kommentar von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withannotator = {{mit Erl\"auterungen von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withintroduction = {{mit einer Einleitung von}{eingel\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withforeword = {{mit einem Vorwort von}{mit einem Vorw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ withafterword = {{mit einem Nachwort von}{mit einem Nachw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortr = {{herausgegeben und \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorco = {{herausgegeben und kommentiert von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoran = {{herausgegeben und erl\"autert von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorin = {{herausgegeben und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorfo = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoraf = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrco = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortran = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortraf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcoin = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcofo = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcoaf = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranin = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranfo = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranaf = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcoin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcofo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcoaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorco = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoran = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorin = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorfo = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoraf = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcoin = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcofo = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcoaf = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranin = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranfo = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranaf = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
index 186bd8446d8..42977d7d16f 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
@@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ my @TLP_working = qw(
begriff bera betababel beton
bez123 bezos bgreek
bib-fr bibarts bibhtml
- biblatex biblatex-apa biblatex-chem biblatex-nature biblatex-philosophy
- biblatex-science
+ biblatex biblatex-apa biblatex-chem biblatex-dw biblatex-nature
+ biblatex-philosophy biblatex-science
bibleref biblist bibtopic
bibtopicprefix bibexport
bibunits bidi bigfoot bigints binomexp bizcard
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
index b0317522566..7d3c1d79258 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
@@ -103,7 +103,6 @@ $Master = "$mydir/../..";
'bgreek', "&MAKEcopy",
'bib2ml', "die 'skipping, no self-locate?, etc.'",
'biber', "die 'skipping, arch-dependent perl, etc.'",
- 'biblatex-dw', "die 'skipping, depends on experimental biblatex'",
'biblatex-mla',"die 'skipping, depends on experimental biblatex'",
'bibtool', "die 'skipping, requires compilation'",
'bibtopicprefix', "&MAKEflatten",
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/biblatex-dw.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/biblatex-dw.tlpsrc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/biblatex-dw.tlpsrc
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc
index 8e09131f0b9..13b96708ffc 100644
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ depend bibhtml
depend biblatex
depend biblatex-apa
depend biblatex-chem
+depend biblatex-dw
depend biblatex-nature
depend biblatex-philosophy
depend biblatex-science